4-549-307-12(1)
Solid-State Memory
Camcorder
PXW-X200
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly
and retain it for future reference.
© 2014 Sony Corporation
Table of Contents
Overview
Part Identification ..................................................................... 8
Camcorder ...................................................................... 8
IR Remote Commander (Supplied) .............................. 13
On-Screen Indications ............................................................ 14
Direct Menu Operation ................................................ 16
Preparations
Power Supply ........................................................................... 18
Using a Battery Pack .................................................... 18
Using AC Power (DC IN Power) ................................. 19
Turning the Power On/Off ........................................... 19
Setting the Clock ..................................................................... 20
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder ....................... 20
Adjusting the LCD Monitor ......................................... 20
Adjusting the Viewfinder ............................................. 20
Using the IR Remote Commander ........................................ 21
Using SxS Memory Cards ...................................................... 22
About SxS Memory Cards ........................................... 22
Inserting/Removing an SxS Memory Card .................. 23
Switching Between SxS Memory Cards ...................... 23
Formatting an SxS Memory Card ................................ 23
Checking the Remaining Time Available for
Recording ............................................................... 24
Restoring an SxS Memory Card .................................. 24
Using Other Media .................................................................. 25
XQD Memory Cards .................................................... 25
SD Cards ...................................................................... 25
USB Flash Drives ......................................................... 26
Recording
Basic Operation Procedure .................................................... 28
Changing Basic Settings ......................................................... 30
Video Formats .............................................................. 30
ND Filter ...................................................................... 31
White Balance .............................................................. 31
2
Table of Contents
Markers/Zebra Patterns ................................................ 32
Gain .............................................................................. 32
Electronic Shutter ......................................................... 33
Iris ................................................................................ 33
Zoom ............................................................................ 34
Focus ............................................................................ 34
Steady Shot ................................................................... 35
Flickers ......................................................................... 35
Time Data ..................................................................... 36
Recording Audio Signals ........................................................ 36
Using the Built-in Stereo Microphones ........................ 36
Using External Inputs ................................................... 36
Using an External Microphone .................................... 36
Adjusting the Audio Recording Levels ........................ 37
Monitoring the Audio ................................................... 37
Useful Functions ...................................................................... 38
Color Bars/Reference Tone .......................................... 38
Shot Marks ................................................................... 38
OK/NG/KP Flags (UDF and exFAT) .......................... 39
OK Mark (FAT HD Mode Only) ................................. 39
Rec Review .................................................................. 39
Assignable Buttons ....................................................... 40
Interval Recording ........................................................ 40
Frame Recording .......................................................... 40
Clip Continuous Recording (UDF and exFAT) ........... 41
Picture Cache Recording: Retroactively Record .......... 42
Slow & Quick Motion .................................................. 43
Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots ......................... 44
Freeze Mix: Image Alignment ..................................... 44
Automatic Adjustment of Flange Focal Length ........... 45
Picture Profiles ............................................................. 45
Deleting Clips ............................................................... 53
Storing/Retrieving the Setting Data ............................. 53
Planning Metadata ........................................................ 54
Obtaining Location Information (GPS) ....................... 56
Proxy Recording ..................................................................... 58
Usable SD Cards .......................................................... 58
Formatting an SD Card ................................................ 58
Checking the Remaining Time ..................................... 58
Performing Proxy Recording ....................................... 58
Changing the Proxy Recording Setting ........................ 59
About the Recorded File .............................................. 59
Storage Destination of the Recorded File .................... 59
About the File Name .................................................... 59
Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN .................... 59
Attaching the IFU-WLM3 ............................................ 60
Table of Contents
3
Connecting with the Wireless LAN Access Point
Mode ...................................................................... 60
Connecting with the Wireless LAN Station Mode ...... 62
Connecting to the Internet ..................................................... 63
Connecting with a modem ........................................... 63
Connecting with the wireless LAN Wi-Fi station
mode ....................................................................... 64
Connecting to the Internet with a LAN cable .............. 65
List of functions for network connections ................... 66
Uploading a File ...................................................................... 67
Preparations .................................................................. 67
Selecting the File and Uploading ................................. 67
Transmitting streaming video and audio .............................. 68
Preparations .................................................................. 68
Starting streaming ........................................................ 70
Conditions .................................................................... 70
Stop streaming .............................................................. 70
Using the Wi-Fi Remote Commander ................................... 71
About the Web Menu ............................................................. 73
Streaming Format settings ............................................ 74
Monitoring settings ...................................................... 74
Streaming settings ........................................................ 74
Proxy Format settings .................................................. 75
Wireless LAN Settings (Station Settings) .................... 75
Upload Settings ............................................................ 76
Starting file transferring automatically after
recording ................................................................ 78
Re-starting file transferring (Resume function) ........... 78
Checking the File Transferring (Job List) .................... 78
Error/Warning Indicator ............................................... 78
Playback
Thumbnail Screens ................................................................. 79
Configuration of the Thumbnail Screen ....................... 79
Changing the Type of Thumbnail Screen .................... 80
Playing Clips ............................................................................ 81
Playing the Selected and Subsequent Clips in
Sequence ................................................................ 81
Monitoring Audio ......................................................... 82
Cueing Up .................................................................... 82
Adding Shot Marks During Playback (UDF, exFAT, and
FAT HD Mode) ..................................................... 82
Clip Operations ....................................................................... 82
4
Table of Contents
Clip Operation Menus .................................................. 82
Basic Operations of the Clip Operation Menus ........... 83
Displaying the Detailed Information of a Clip ............. 84
Adding/Deleting a Flag (UDF and exFAT) ................. 85
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark (FAT HD Mode
Only) ...................................................................... 85
Copying Clips ............................................................... 85
Deleting Clips ............................................................... 86
Displaying the EXPAND CLIP Screen ........................ 86
Displaying the SHOT MARK Screen (UDF, exFAT, and
FAT HD Mode) ..................................................... 87
Adding/Deleting Shot Marks (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD
Mode) ..................................................................... 88
Changing the Index Frame (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD
Mode) ..................................................................... 88
Dividing a Clip (FAT HD Mode Only) ........................ 88
Showing the Status Screens .................................................... 89
Camera Status Screen ................................................... 89
Audio Status Screen ..................................................... 89
Video Status Screen ..................................................... 90
Button/Remote Status Screen ....................................... 90
Battery/Media Status Screen ........................................ 90
GPS positioning status indication ................................ 91
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Overview of the Setup Menus ................................................ 92
Setup Menu Layers ...................................................... 92
Basic Menu Operations .......................................................... 94
Setup Menu List ...................................................................... 96
CAMERA SET Menu .................................................. 96
AUDIO SET Menu .................................................... 104
VIDEO SET Menu ..................................................... 106
LCD/VF SET Menu ................................................... 109
TC/UB SET Menu ...................................................... 112
NETWORK SET Menu ............................................. 114
OTHERS Menu .......................................................... 118
Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices .... 126
Operating Clips With a Computer ...................................... 127
Connecting via i.LINK (FAT only) ..................................... 129
Recording the Camcorder Picture on an External
Device .................................................................. 129
Table of Contents
5
Nonlinear Editing ....................................................... 130
Recording External Input Signals .............................. 130
External Synchronization ..................................................... 131
Appendices
Important Notes on Operation ............................................ 134
Video Format (Format) ........................................................ 138
UDF HD Mode ........................................................... 138
UDF SD Mode ........................................................... 138
exFAT HD Mode ....................................................... 139
exFAT SD Mode ........................................................ 139
FAT HD Mode ........................................................... 140
FAT SD Mode ............................................................ 140
Formats and Limitations of Outputs .................................. 141
Video Formats and Output Signals ............................ 141
Limitations of Inputs/Outputs .................................... 149
Video Format and the Recording Function ................ 150
Backup Battery Replacement .............................................. 154
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 155
Power .......................................................................... 155
Recording/Playback ................................................... 155
External Devices ........................................................ 156
When Making a Wireless LAN Connection .............. 156
The Internet connection .............................................. 156
Wired LAN connection .............................................. 156
Error/Warning Indications .................................................. 157
Error Indications ......................................................... 157
Warning Indications ................................................... 157
Licenses .................................................................................. 161
MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio License .................... 161
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio License ................... 161
Bitmap Fonts .............................................................. 161
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ..................... 161
About JQuery, Sizzle.js and Jansson .......................... 166
About OpenSSL ......................................................... 166
Specifications ......................................................................... 169
General ....................................................................... 169
Lens ............................................................................ 172
Camera Section .......................................................... 172
Inputs/Outputs ............................................................ 173
Monitoring .................................................................. 174
Built-in Microphone ................................................... 174
Media .......................................................................... 174
6
Table of Contents
Supplied Accessories ................................................. 174
Optional Accessories .................................................. 174
Index ....................................................................................... 176
Table of Contents
7
Overview
Overview
Part Identification
For functions and usage, see the pages in parentheses.
Camcorder
Operation panel on the
handle (page 10)
1
2 3 45
9
Lens control
block (page 11)
Side operation panel
(page 11)
1. Lens hood
Attach
Insert the hood by aligning the mark on the
camcorder and hood then turn the hood
clockwise (in the opposite direction of arrow 2
in the illustration below), with the front of the
camcorder facing forward, until the hood is
locked.
Detach
1 Press the PUSH (lens food removing) button,
2 turn the hood in the direction of the arrow, 3
then withdraw it.
PUSH (lens hood
removing) button
8
Part Identification
Rear connector
panel (page 12)
8
6
7
Card slot block (page 12)
2. Headphone connector (stereo mini jack)
(page 37)
3. Rear remote sensor
4. Power switch (page 19)
5. BATT RELEASE button (page 18)
6. DC IN connector (page 19)
7. Battery pack receptacle (page 18)
8. WHITE BAL (automatic white balance
adjustment) button (page 32)
9. Lens cap open/close lever (page 28)
2 3 14
4
12
5 678
Overview
1
13
12
11
Controls on the grip
(page 13)
10
1. Viewfinder (page 20)
How to attach the EVF large eyecup
Stretch the EVF large eyecup for attaching to
the viewfinder and insert it aligning with the
horizontal groove of the eyecup.
9
6. Built-in stereo microphone (page 36)
7. REC/TALLY lamp
8. Front IR remote control receptor
9. Built-in speaker (page 82)
10. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors (XLR)
and input selection (LINE/MIC/
MIC+48V) switches (page 36)
11. Microphone cable holder (page 36)
12. Hooks for the shoulder strap
EVF large eyecup
(supplied)
Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown
below.
2. Rear accessory shoe (page 10)
3. External microphone holder (page 36)
4. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) monitor
3
4
2
(page 20)
5. Front accessory shoe
The cover is attached. You can mount an
accessory compatible with the Multi
Interface Shoe.
For details about the compatible accessories
with the Multi Interface Shoe, contact your
dealer.
1
13. Eyepiece focusing knob (page 21)
14. GPS module
This part contains the GPS module.
Note
Holding this part while using GPS functions may
affect the positioning accuracy.
Part Identification
9
Overview
To mount the accessory shoe
Mount the accessory shoe on the accessory shoe
mount as illustrated.
Accessory shoe plate
Accessory shoe
Operation panel on the handle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Accessory shoe
18
9
Accessory shoe plate
1. Lift the edge of the accessory shoe plate and
pull it in the direction opposite to that of the
arrow on the accessory shoe plate and
remove it from the accessory shoe.
2. Place the accessory shoe so its protrusions
match recesses of the accessory shoe mount,
then fix it to the mount with four screws.
3. Insert the accessory shoe plate in the
direction of the arrow on the plate surface
until the end of the plate engages the end of
the shoe.
To remove the accessory shoe
Remove the shoe plate in the same way as step 1
of “To mount the accessory shoe.” Loosen the 4
screws and remove the accessory shoe from the
accessory shoe mount.
1. PLAY/PAUSE button (page 81)
2. F REV (fast reverse) button (page 82)
3. THUMBNAIL button (page 79)
4. STOP/CAM button (page 79)
5. STATUS (status display on/off) button
(page 89)
6. PREV (previous) button
7. Up/down/left/right buttons, SEL/SET
(select/set) button (page 94)
8. MENU (menu display on/off) button (page
94)
9. On-handle ZOOM button (page 34)
10. F FWD (fast forward) button (page 82)
11. LCD BRIGHT (LCD brightness
adjustment) button (page 20)
12. NEXT (clip directional jump) button
(page 82)
13. DISPLAY button (page 14)
14. VOLUME (monitor volume) buttons
(page 38)
15. CANCEL button
16. DURATION/TC/U-BIT (time data
selection) button (page 36)
17. REC START/STOP button (page 29)
18. REC HOLD lever (page 29)
10
Part Identification
Lens control block
Side operation panel
1. Focus ring (page 34)
2. Zoom ring (page 34)
3. STEADY SHOT button (page 35)
4. IRIS switch (page 33)
5. Iris ring (page 33)
6. ND FILTER select switch (page 31)
7. MACRO switch (page 35)
8. FOCUS switch (page 34)
9. PUSH AUTO (momentary auto focus)
button (page 35)
2 3
4
10
11 12 13
7 8 9
5
6
Overview
1
1. ASSIGN (assignable) 1/2/3/4 buttons (page
40)
“Zebra” is set to ASSIGN 1 and “Peaking” is
set to ASSIGN 2 by default.
2. FULL AUTO button and indicator (page
28)
3. PICTURE PROFILE button (page 46)
4. AUDIO IN (audio input selection)
switches (page 36)
5. AUDIO SELECT (audio level control
mode selection) switches (page 37)
6. AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs (page
37)
7. SHUTTER switch (page 33)
8. GAIN switch (page 32)
9. WHITE BAL (white balance memory)
switch (page 31)
10. ASSIGN (assignable) 5 button (page 40)
11. MENU (menu display on/off) button (page
94)
12. SEL/SET dial (jog dial) (page 94)
It functions accordingly when you turn it up or
down, or you push it horizontally.
It is called the “jog dial” in the subsequent
operating instructions.
13. CANCEL button
Part Identification
11
Card slot block
Rear connector panel
Overview
The SxS memory card slots and EJECT buttons
are located behind the cover.
1
5
Open the cover
1
2
3
4
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1. External device connector (page 26, 60)
2. PC connector (page 127)
3. i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (4-pin, S400
conforming to IEEE1394) (page 127)
4. A/V OUT (audio/video multi output)
4
connector (page 127)
5. N mark
1. ACCESS lamps (page 23)
2. SxS memory card slots (page 23)
3. EJECT (SxS memory card eject) buttons
(page 23)
4. SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card select)
button (page 23)
• Hold a NFC-compatible smartphone near
this mark when making wireless
connection between the camcorder and
smartphone. For details, refer to the
operating instructions of the smartphone.
• NFC (Near Field Communication) is the
international standard for the short range
radio communication technique.
6. HDMI OUT connector (page 126)
7. SD card ACCESS lamp
Lights in red while accessing the loaded SD
card.
8. SD card slot for proxy recording (page 58)
9. SDI OUT (serial digital output) connector
(BNC type) (page 126)
10. TC IN (timecode input)/TC OUT
(timecode output) connector (BNC type)
(page 132)
11. IN/OUT (input/output change) switch
(page 133)
Set this to IN to select TC IN and GENLOCK
IN, and set this to OUT to select TC OUT and
VIDEO OUT.
12. GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT (analog
video output) connector (BNC type) (page
126, 132)
12
Part Identification
Controls on the grip
IR Remote Commander (Supplied)
Overview
1
2
3
4
5
1. REC REVIEW button (page 29)
2. Power zoom lever (page 34)
3. FOCUS MAG button (page 34)
4. LENS REMOTE (lens remote controller)
connector (page 34)
5. REC START (start/stop recording)
1. DATA CODE button
This button does not work on the camcorder.
2. TC RESET (timecode reset) button
3. SCAN/SLOW (reverse high speed
playback/high speed playback) buttons
button (page 29)
4. . > (PREV/NEXT(clip reverse/
Bottom
forward direction jump)) buttons
5. PLAY button
6. STOP button
7. DISPLAY button
8. Transmitter
9. START/STOP (recording start/stop)
button
10. Power zoom lever
11. PAUSE button
12. MODE button
1
2
3
This button does not work on the camcorder.
13. b/B/v/V/ENTER buttons
1. ZOOM (zoom mode switching) switch
(page 34)
2. Tripod receptacles
Note
Check that the size of the hole matches the screw of
the tripod. If they do not match, the camcorder
cannot be attached to the tripod securely, and this
may lead to the physical injury of the camera
operator.
3. Backup battery holder (page 154)
Part Identification
13
Overview
On-Screen Indications
While recording (or standing by to record), pressing the DISPLAY button displays the statuses and
settings of this unit on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.
Remarks
[M]: The indication of the items named with this suffix can be independently turned on/off with “Display
On/Off” of the LCD/VF SET menu (page 110).
[A]: The indication of items named with this suffix can be turned on/off using the assignable buttons to
which the corresponding on/off functions have been assigned (page 40).
[D]: The settings of the items named with this suffix can be changed using the Direct menu on the screen
(page 16).
SD
1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage
zS&Q REC
indication [M] (page 18)
2. i.LINK status indication/Streaming status
indication
The status of the connected equipment (page
129) or the streaming status is displayed (page
70).
3. Special recording/operation status
indication
zREC
STBY
CONT
14
Recording in progress
Standby for recording
Standby for Clip Continuous
Recording
“CONT” lit: Indicates that a
clip is being continued when
using Clip Continuous
Recording.
“CONT” flashing: Indicates
that there is no continuing clip
when using Clip Continuous
Recording.
On-Screen Indications
S&Q STBY
zINT REC
INT STBY
zFRM REC
FRM STBY
zCACHE
zSML REC
SML STBY
zSML&CONT
Slow & Quick Motion
recording in progress
Standby for Slow & Quick
Motion recording
Interval Recording in progress
Standby for Interval
Recording
Frame Recording in progress
Standby for Frame Recording
z in green: Standby for
Picture Cache Recording
z in red: Picture Cache
Recording in progress
Simultaneous Recording in
the 2 slots in progress
Standby for Simultaneous
Recording of the 2 slots
Simultaneous Recording in
the 2 slots and Clip
Continuous Recording in
progress
SML&CONT
4. Media status indication
Memory card in slot A is active.
Memory card in slot B is active.
5. Time data indication [M] (page 36)
6. Media remaining indication [M] (page 24)
7. Zoom position indication [M] (page 34)
8. Brightness level indication [M][A]
9. Synchronous recording indication [M]
12. TLCS mode indication [M][D] (page 102)
Backlight mode
STD
Standard mode
Overview
Standby for Simultaneous
Recording in the 2 slots and
Clip Continuous Recording
“SML&CONT” lit: Indicates
that a clip is being continued
when using a combination of
Simultaneous Recording in
the 2 slots and Clip
Continuous Recording.
“SML&CONT” flashing:
Indicates that there is no
continuing clip when using a
combination of Simultaneous
Recording in the 2 slots and
Clip Continuous Recording.
zSML&CACHE z in green: Standby when
using a combination of
Standby for Simultaneous
Recording in the 2 slots and
Picture Cache Recording
z in red: Recording in
progress when using a
combination of Standby for
Simultaneous Recording in
the 2 slots and Picture Cache
Recording
Spotlight mode
13. Steady Shot indication [M][D] (page 35)
14. Focus mode indication [M] ([D] only in MF
mode) (page 34)
15. White balance mode and color
temperature indications [M][D] (page 31)
16. Picture profile indication [M][D] (page 45)
17. Depth-of-Field bar indication [M][A]
18. Iris position indication [M][D] (page 33)
19. Gain indication [M][D] (page 32)
20. Shutter mode/shutter speed indication
[M][D] (page 33)
21. Audio level meters [M]
22. Histogram indication [M][A]
23. Video level cautioning indication [M]
/Recommended ND filter number
indication/Clip uploading status
indication
The clip uploading status indication is displayed
when connected via wireless LAN. The number
of remaining clips for uploading and uploading
rate are displayed.
24. SD card remaining space indication
The remaining space of the SD card is displayed
while the SD card is inserted in the card slot of
the camcorder (page 58).
(page 126)
“Rec2” appears when recording while “SDI
Rec Control” of the VIDEO SET menu is set
to “HD SDI Remote I/F.”
“Rec2-P” appears when recording
synchronously while “Proxy” of the
CAMERA SET menu is set to “On.”
10. GPS status indication
The GPS positioning status are displayed as
icons.
“Obtaining Location Information (GPS)” (page 56)
11. ND FILTER position [M]
Displays the selected ND filter number (page
31).
On-Screen Indications
15
25. Network connection status indication
The network connection status is displayed as icons.
Overview
Conditions
NETWORK SET
menu>”NW&
Proxy”/”USB”
“Off” or “USB A”
“Network&Proxy”
Icon
NETWORK SET
menu>”Network
Mode
Network
connection status
–
“Off”
“Access Point”
–
–
Preparing Wi-Fi
“Station”
Connected to Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi cannot be
connected 1)
Preparing Wi-Fi
Connected to Wi-Fi
Flashing
AP
Flashing
Intensity 1
Intensity 2
Intensity 3
Intensity 4
The icon changes depending on the
radio wave intensity.
Modem
Disconnected from WiFi
Wi-Fi cannot be
connected 1)
Preparing 3G/4G
Connected to 3G/4G
Wired LAN
No radio wave
Flashing
3G/4G
Disconnected from 3G/ 3G/4G
4G
3G/4G cannot be
connected 2)
Preparing LAN
Flashing
Connected to LAN
Disconnected from
LAN
LAN cannot be
LAN
LAN
connected 3)
1) When the USB wireless LAN module is not connected, or the SSID is not set.
2) When the 3G/4G/LTE modem (optional) is not connected
3) When the USB-RJ45 adaptor (optional) is not connected
26. Special recording mode indication [M] ([D]
only in Slow & Quick Motion Standby)
Frame Rec
Interval Rec
S&Q Motion
xx/xx fps
Frame Rec mode
Interval Rec mode
Slow & Quick Motion mode
27. Video format indication [M] (page 30)
28. Clip name indication [M] (page 29)
Direct Menu Operation
The settings of the items named with a suffix [D]
can be changed using the Direct menu on the
screen.
Select “All,” “Part,” or “Off” for Direct Menu
using “Direct Menu” (page 120) of the OTHERS
menu.
Note
When the indicator of the FULL AUTO button is lit, the
Direct Menu operation is disabled for the functions that
are forcibly set to the automatic mode in Full Auto mode
(page 28).
16
On-Screen Indications
1
Overview
When the camcorder’s status or settings
are displayed on the screen, press the
SEL/SET button (page 10) or the jog
dial (page 11).
If “Direct Menu” is set to “All” or “Part,” the
cursor is displayed on one of the items for
which the Direct menu operation is
permitted.
2
Press the up/down/left/right buttons
(page 10) or rotate the jog dial to set the
cursor to the item to be operated, then
press the SEL/SET button or the jog
dial.
The Direct menu of the selected items appears.
3
Press the up/down/left/right buttons or
rotate the jog dial to select a setting,
then press the SEL/SET button or the
jog dial.
The menu disappears, and the new setting is
displayed.
On-Screen Indications
17
Preparations
Power Supply
Preparations
You can use a battery pack or AC power via an
AC adaptor.
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and
AC adaptor listed below:
Lithium-ion Battery Pack
BP-U30
BP-U60
BP-U60T
BP-U90
Battery Charger/AC Adaptor
BC-U1
BC-U2
The life expectancy of the AC adapter and the
electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under
normal operating temperatures and normal usage
(8 hours per day; 25 days per month). If usage
exceeds the above normal usage frequency, the
life expectancy may be reduced correspondingly.
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for
battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable
part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if
the pins of the battery terminal are bent or
deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they
become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to keep
the unit working properly and to prolong its
usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative for
more information about inspections.
Note
The AC adaptor cannot be connected to the camcorder
while the battery pack is inserted.
Using a Battery Pack
Fully insert the battery pack into the battery pack
receptacle (page 8), then slide it down to lock it.
To remove the battery pack, press and hold the
BATT RELEASE button (page 8), slide the
battery pack upward to unlock it, then pull it out.
Notes
• Before use, charge the battery pack with the supplied
BC-U1 or BC-U2 Battery Charger.
• A warm battery pack immediately after use may not be
able to be fully recharged.
• The high-capacity BP-U90 Battery Pack is large, and
protrudes from the camcorder when attached. When
using the camcorder with the BP-U90 attached for
extended recording periods, Sony recommends
attaching the camcorder to a tripod for convenience.
Checking battery charge remaining
When recording or playback is in progress on the
battery pack, an icon to show the current battery
charge level and usage time remaining are
displayed on the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen
(page 14).
Icon
Remaining
100% to 91%
90% to 71%
70% to 51%
WARNING
50% to 31%
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
30% to 11%
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey
the law in the relative area or country.
18
Power Supply
10% to 0%
The camcorder indicates the remaining usage
time in minutes by calculating the available time
with the battery pack if operation is continued at
the current rate of power consumption.
If the battery charge remaining becomes
low
To change the message levels
The Low BATT level is set to 10% of full charge,
and the BATT Empty level is set to 3% of full
charge at the factory. These settings can be
changed with “Battery Alarm” (page 120) of the
OTHERS menu.
To turn the power on, set the power switch (page
8) to the ON position (the ? position). To turn the
power off, set the power switch to the OFF
position (the 1 position).
Notes
• This camcorder uses a little standby power even when
the power switch is set to OFF. Remove the battery
pack if the camcorder will not be used for a prolonged
period.
• When removing the battery pack or the DC IN power,
be sure to first set the power switch to the OFF
position. Removing the battery pack or the DC IN
power while the camcorder is on may cause damage to
the camcorder or the SxS memory card.
Preparations
If the battery charge remaining decreases to a
certain level during operation (Low BATT
status), a low-battery message, flashing of the
tally lamps, and a beep sound will warn you.
If the remaining further decreases to a level at
which operation cannot be continued (BATT
Empty status), a battery-empty message appears.
Replace the battery pack with one that is fully
charged.
Turning the Power On/Off
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)
Connection example: when connecting BC-U1
1
2
3
DC
OU
T
CH
ARG
E
0%
80
BATTE
BCU1 RY CH
ARG
100
ER
BC-U1
1
Connect the DC power output cable of
the BC-U1 to the DC IN connector of
the camcorder.
2
Connect the power cord of the BC-U1 to
an AC power source.
3
Set the mode switch of the BC-U1 to the
DC OUT position.
Power Supply
19
Setting the Clock
Preparations
When you turn the camcorder on for the first time
after purchasing or replacing the backup battery
(page 154), the Initial Setting display appears on
the LCD monitor/viewfinder screen.
Set the date and time of the built-in clock, using
this display.
Time Zone
The value shows the time difference from UTC
(Coordinated Universal Time).
Change the setting if needed.
Setting the time and date
Press the up/down/left/right buttons (page 10) or
turn the jog dial (page 11) to move the cursor,
then press the SEL/SET button or the jog dial to
set each menu item. When you press the SEL/
SET button or the jog dial when the cursor is on
“Finish,” the Initial Setting display disappears
and the clock setting is completed.
After the Initial Setting display disappears, “Time
Zone” (page 118) and “Clock Set” (page 118) of
the OTHERS menu can be used to set “Time
Zone” and “Date/Time.”
Notes
• If the clock setting is cleared because of exhaustion of
the backup battery while no operation power was being
supplied (no battery pack and no DC IN connection),
the Initial Setting display will be displayed when you
turn the camcorder on at the next opportunity.
• While the Initial Setting display is shown, no other
operation except turning the power off is permitted
until you finish the setting for this display.
Adjusting the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor turns on when it is opened and
turns off when it is returned to the park position.
Adjusting the angle
It can be rotated as much as 90 degrees in the
direction facing the subject and as much as 180
degrees in the opposite direction.
When you rotate it 90 degrees toward the subject,
the image on the monitor becomes upside down,
indicating the mirror image of the subject. The
display direction of the textual information is
converted to the readable direction.
Adjusting the backlight
Press the LCD BRIGHT button (page 10) to
adjust the brightness of the backlight.
Adjusting the color, contrast, and
brightness
These adjustments can be made using “LCD”
(page 109) of the LCD/VF SET menu. These
adjustments of the LCD monitor have no effect on
pictures being recorded.
Adjusting the Viewfinder
If the picture on the LCD monitor is hard to view
under bright ambient light, you can use the
viewfinder to check the picture.
Caution
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece of
the viewfinder facing the sun. Direct sunlight can
enter through the eyepiece, be focused in the
viewfinder, and cause fire.
Hereafter the viewfinder is referred to as “EVF”
(abbreviation of Electronic Viewfinder).
20
Setting the Clock / Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
Turning the EVF on/off
Using the IR Remote
Commander
Before use
Before you use the supplied IR Remote
Commander for the first time, pull out the
insulation sheet from the battery holder.
Adjusting the focus in the EVF
Insulation sheet
Preparations
With the factory setting, the EVF is turned on
when the LCD monitor is in its park position or is
rotated to face the subject.
You can change the setting so that the EVF is
always on regardless of the status in the LCD
monitor, using “EVF” (page 109) of the LCD/VF
SET menu. Change the “Power” setting from
“Auto” to “On.”
The eyepiece focusing (diopter compensation)
knob (page 9) enables adjustment to match the
eyesight of the operator, who can then view the
image clearly through the eyepiece.
Adjusting the backlight
The brightness of the backlight for the EVF can
be switched between High and Low.
Set “Backlight” in “EVF” (page 109) of the LCD/
VF SET menu.
Switching between color and
monochrome modes
For the EVF screen, color or monochrome display
can be selected.
Set “Mode” in “EVF” (page 109) of the LCD/VF
SET menu.
Select “B&W” if checking the subject and
focusing are easier on the monochrome display.
If you assign “EVF Mode” to one of the
assignable buttons (page 40), you can switch
between color and monochrome by pressing the
button.
Adjusting the contrast and brightness
Use “EVF” (page 109) of the LCD/VF SET menu
to make adjustments. Adjusting the brightness
and other items has no effect on pictures being
recorded.
A CR2025 lithium battery is set in the holder at
the factory.
Using the IR Remote Commander
For controlling the camcorder from the IR
Remote Commander, activate the remote control
function of the camcorder after turning the power
on.
Activating/deactivating the remote control
function can be achieved using the Setup menu.
To activate using the menu
Press the MENU button to set the camcorder to
Menu mode, then set “IR Remote” (page 120) of
the System menu to “On.”
To activate using the assignable button
If you assign “IR Remote” to one of the
assignable buttons (page 40), you can switch
between activating and deactivating the remote
control function by pressing the button.
Notes
• Aim the IR Remote Commander towards the remote
sensor to operate your camcorder.
• Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources
such as direct sunlight or overhead lighting. Otherwise,
the IR Remote Commander may not function properly.
• When you are operating with the IR Remote
Commander supplied with your camcorder, your video
device may also operate. In that case, select a
commander mode other than DVD2 for your video
device, or cover the sensor of your video device with
black paper.
• The remote control function is deactivated
automatically when the camcorder is turned off to
prevent a malfunction. To use the remote control
function, activate it when the camcorder is turned on.
Using the IR Remote Commander
21
Replacing the battery in the IR Remote
Commander
Use a commercially available CR2025 lithium
battery. Do not use any battery other than a
CR2025.
Preparations
1. While pressing on the tab, inset your
fingernail into the slit to pull out the battery
case.
2. Place a new battery with the + side facing up.
3. Insert the battery case back into the IR
Remote Commander until it clicks.
Using SxS Memory
Cards
This camcorder records audio and video on SxS
memory cards (optional) inserted in the card slots.
About SxS Memory Cards
Usable SxS memory cards
Use the following Sony-made SxS memory cards.
Operations are not guaranteed with memory cards
other than the following cards.
Tab
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
WARNING
• Battery may explode if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in
fire.
• Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
SxS-1 series
These cards comply with the ExpressCard
standard.
For details on using SxS memory cards and usagerelated precautions, refer to the instruction manual
for the SxS memory card.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey
the law in the relative area or country.
22
Using SxS Memory Cards
SxS, SxS PRO and SxS-1 are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
The ExpressCard word mark and logo are owned
by Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association (PCMCIA) and are
licensed to Sony Corporation. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Switching Between SxS Memory
Cards
Inserting an SxS memory card
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card
slots A and B, press the SLOT SELECT button
(page 12) to select the card you wish to use.
If a card becomes full during recording, switching
to the other card is automatically executed.
1
Open the cover of the card slot block
(page 12).
2
Insert the SxS memory card into the slot
with the SxS label facing right.
The ACCESS lamp (page 12) lights in red
then changes to green once the memory card
is ready for use.
3
Close the cover.
Status indications by the ACCESS lamps
Card slots A and B are accompanied by the
respective ACCESS lamps to indicate their
statuses.
Lamp
Slot statuses
Lights in
red
Lights in
green
Accessing the loaded SxS memory card
(writing/reading data)
Standby (ready for recording or
playback using the loaded SxS memory
card)
• No SxS memory card is loaded.
• The loaded card is invalid.
• An SxS memory card is loaded, but
another slot is active.
Off
Removing an SxS memory card
1
Open the cover of the card slot block,
press the EJECT button (page 12), then
pull the button out.
2
Press the EJECT button again to
remove the card.
Note
Data are not guaranteed if the power is turned off or a
memory card is removed while the card is being
accessed. All data on the card may be destroyed. Be sure
that the ACCESS lamps are lit in green or off when you
turn off the power or remove memory cards.
Note
The SLOT SELECT button is disabled while playback is
in progress. Switching is not executed even if you press
the button. The button is enabled while the thumbnail
screen is displayed (page 79).
Preparations
Inserting/Removing an SxS
Memory Card
Formatting an SxS Memory Card
For an SxS memory card that is not formatted or
that was formatted with another system, the
message “Unsupported File System” is displayed
on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Format the card as instructed in “To execute
formatting” below.
To execute formatting
Using “Format Media” (page 123) of the
OTHERS menu, specify “Media(A)” (slot
A) or “Media(B)” (slot B) then select
“Execute.” On a confirmation message,
select “Execute” again.
The in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
When formatting is completed, the completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
Recording/playback during formatting
You can perform recording or playback using the
SxS memory card in the other card slot while
formatting is in progress.
If formatting fails
A write-protected SxS memory card or memory
card that cannot be used with this camcorder will
not be formatted.
As a warning message is displayed, replace the
card with an appropriate SxS memory card, as per
the instructions in the message.
Using SxS Memory Cards
23
Notes
• Use the format function of this camcorder to format
SxS memory cards for use on this camcorder. The
formats of cards formatted on other devices are not
recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to
format them again on this camcorder.
• All the data, including recorded pictures and setup
files, are erased when a memory card is formatted.
Preparations
Checking the Remaining Time
Available for Recording
While recording (or standing by to record), you
can check the time remaining for the SxS memory
cards loaded in the card slots on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen (page 14).
The available time for recording with the current
video format (recording bit rate) is calculated
according to the remaining space of each card and
displayed in time units of minutes.
The remaining can also be checked in a meter
format on the Battery/Media status screen (page
90).
Note
A
icon appears if the memory card is writeprotected.
Replacing an SxS memory card
• If the available time on two cards in total
becomes less than 5 minutes, a message “Media
Near Full,” flashing of the tally lamps, and a
beep sound will warn you. Replace the cards
with those with sufficient space.
• If you continue recording until the total
remaining time reaches zero, the message
changes to “Media Full,” and recording stops.
Note
Approximately 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS
memory card at maximum.
If the number of recorded clips reaches the limit, the
remaining time indication becomes “0,” and the message
“Media Full” is displayed.
Restoring an SxS Memory Card
If an error occurs with data in a memory card for
some reason, the card must be restored.
If an SxS memory card that needs to be restored
is loaded, a message that prompts you to execute
a restore operation is displayed on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen.
24
Using SxS Memory Cards
To restore a card
Select “Execute” by pressing the up/down/
left/right buttons or turning the jog dial,
then push the SEL/SET button or the jog
dial.
During restoration, the in-progress message and
status bar (%) are displayed, and the ACCESS
lamp is lit in red.
When restoration is completed, the completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
If restoration fails
• A write-protected SxS memory card or one on
which an error occurred cannot be restored. For
such a card, a warning message is displayed.
Release the write protection or replace the card,
as per the instructions in the message.
• An SxS memory card on which an error
occurred may become usable again through
repeated formatting.
• In some cases, only parts of clips cannot be
restored. Playback of the restored clips becomes
possible again.
• The following operation may restore an SxS
memory card for which the message “Could not
Restore Some Clips” is repeatedly displayed
each time you try the restoration process:
4 Copy necessary clips to another SxS memory
card, using the copy function (page 85) of the
camcorder or the dedicated application
software (supplied) (page 128).
5 Format the problem SxS memory card, using
the format function of this camcorder.
6 Return the necessary clips to the SxS
memory card by copy operation.
Recording/playback during restoration
You can perform recording or playback using the
SxS memory card in the other card slot while
restoration is in progress.
Note
For restoration of media recorded with this unit, be sure
to use this unit. Media recorded with a device other than
this unit or with another unit of different version (even of
the same model) may not be restored using this unit.
Using Other Media
Notes
XQD Memory Cards
By using an optional QDA-EX1 Media Adaptor,
you can insert an XQD memory card into the SxS
memory card slot and use it instead of an SxS
memory card.
Usable XQD memory cards
XQD memory card G series
XQD memory card S series
XQD memory card N series
For details on using a QDA-EX1 Media Adaptor,
refer to the instruction manual supplied with it.
Notes
• High-speed playback (page 10) may not be properly
achieved with an XQD memory card.
• Slow Motion recording by the Slow & Quick Motion
recording function (page 43) cannot be made with an
XQD memory card.
Formatting
When you use an XQD memory card with this
camcorder, formatting is required.
An XQD memory card to be used with this
camcorder must be formatted using the format
function of this camcorder.
It is also necessary to format an XQD memory
card for use if a caution message is displayed
when you mount the XQD memory card.
For an XQD memory card that was formatted
with another system unsupported by this
camcorder, the message “Unsupported File
System” is displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF
screen.
Format the XQD memory card as instructed
below.
To execute formatting
Using “Format Media” (page 123) of the
OTHERS menu, specify “Media(A)” (slot
An in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
When formatting is completed, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
Note
When formatting, all data in an XQD memory card—
including protected images—are erased and cannot be
restored.
Connection between the camcorder and a PC
To use an XQD memory card in which data have
been recorded with an XDCAM/XDCAM EXseries product, insert it into the slot of the
camcorder and connect between the PC and this
camcorder using a USB cable.
Preparations
• Medias other than an SxS memory card cannot obtain
the high reliability and durability equivalent to an SxS
memory card for professional use.
• Not all memory cards have been verified to function
with this camcorder. For compatible memory cards,
contact your dealer.
A) or “Media(B)” (slot B), then select
“Execute.”
To use media formatted with this camcorder in
the slots of other devices
Make a backup of the media, then format it using
the other device.
SD Cards
When “F.Sys.” in “System” of the OTHERS
menu is set to the FAT mode, use of the optional
MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor permits you to
insert an SD card to the SxS memory card slot and
use it for recording and playback in the same way
as with an SxS memory card.
Usable SD card
Class 10 SDHC card
For details on use of the MEAD-SD02 Media
Adaptor, refer to the operating instructions supplied
with the respective adaptor.
Notes
• High-speed playback (page 10) may not be properly
achieved with an SD card.
• Slow Motion recording by the Slow & Quick Motion
recording function (page 43) cannot be made with an
SD card.
• SD cards do not support recording with UDF/exFAT.
Formatting
When you use an SD card with this camcorder,
formatting is required.
An SD card to be used with this camcorder must
be formatted using the format function of this
camcorder.
Using Other Media
25
Preparations
It is also necessary to format an SD card for use if
a caution message is displayed when you mount
the SD card.
For an SD card that was formatted with another
system unsupported by this camcorder, the
message “Unsupported File System” is displayed
on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Format the SD card as instructed below.
To execute formatting
Using “Format Media” (page 123) of the
OTHERS menu, specify “Media(A)” (slot
A) or “Media(B)” (slot B), then select
“Execute.”
An in-progress message and status bar (%) are
displayed, and the ACCESS lamp lights in red.
When formatting is completed, a completion
message is displayed for three seconds.
Note
When formatting, all data in an SD card including
protected images are erased and cannot be restored.
Connection between the camcorder and a PC
To use an SD card in which data have been
recorded with an XDCAM/XDCAM EX-series
product, insert it into the slot of the camcorder
and connect between the PC and this camcorder
using a USB cable.
To use media formatted with this camcorder in
the slots of other devices
Make a backup of the media, then format it using
the other device.
USB Flash Drives
UDF
In UDF or exFAT, you can connect a USB flash
drive to the external device connector (page 12)
to record, save, and load the following data.
• “Loading a Planning Metadata file” (page 54)
• “Storing/Retrieving the Setting Data” (page
53)
The following Sony USB flash drives are
recommended for use with this camcorder.
• USM-M Series
Notes
• Use USB flash drives with a capacity of 4 GB to 32
GB.
26
Using Other Media
• USB flash drives other than those listed above may not
be recognized if connected to the external device
connector.
When using the external device connector
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) of the
NETWORK SET menu to “USB A.”
Notes
• During this setting, “XAVC-L50 1920×1080/59.94P,
50P” and “XAVC-L35 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P”
cannot be selected for “Format” in “System” (page
121) of the OTHERS menu.
• During this setting, 60fps and 50fps cannot be selected
for “Frame Rate” in “S&Q Motion” when “Format” in
“System” of the OTHERS menu is set to “1920×1080/
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P.”
Formatting (Initializing) USB Flash
Drives
USB flash drives must be formatted with the
FAT32 file system.
Note
Before using a drive, format it on this camcorder or a PC.
If a drive formatted on a PC cannot be used, format it on
the camcorder.
1
Connect a USB flash drive to the
external device connector.
If the drive is unformatted or has been
formatted to other specifications, a message
to confirm whether formatting is to be
executed appears on the EVF screen.
2
Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
the jog dial, select “Execute,” then press
the SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
The in-progress message and status bar (%)
are displayed, and formatting is started.
When formatting is completed, the message
“Format USB Memory Done” is displayed.
The \MSSONY\PRO\XDCAM\MEMDISC
folder and the \General\Sony\Planning folder
are automatically created in the drive.
If the format operation fails
A format operation may fail because the USB
flash drive is write protected, or because it is not
the type of drive specified for use with this
camcorder.
In this case, an error message appears. Follow the
instructions in the error message and exchange
the drive for one that can be used with this
camcorder.
Restoring USB Flash Drives
Preparations
When you load a USB flash drive that cannot be
mounted normally because the file system is
destroyed, a message appears on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen to ask whether you want to
restore it.
Using the up/down/left/right buttons or the jog
dial, select “Execute,” then press the SEL/SET
button or the jog dial. The in-progress message
and status bar (%) are displayed, and restoration
is started.
When restoration is completed, the message
“Restore USB Memory Done” is displayed.
• “XQD” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Using Other Media
27
Recording
Basic Operation Procedure
4 Open the lens cap
Recording
7, 8 REC START/STOP
9 REC REVIEW (on the grip)
5 Power switch:
ON (the " position)
3
LCD monitor
angle
adjustment
6
1 Battery pack insertion
FULL AUTO
2 SxS memory card slots
Preparations
1
Mount a fully charged battery pack.
2
Load SxS memory card(s).
If you load two cards, recording is continued
by automatically switching to the second
card when the first card becomes full.
3
Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor for
the best view.
When you wish to use the EVF, fold the LCD
monitor to its park position and adjust the
angle of the EVF.
4
Open the lens cap.
Pull up the lens cap open/close lever to open
the lens cap built in the lens hood.
5
Set the power switch to the ON position.
The recording screen is displayed.
When using the remote commander, activate the
remote control mode (page 21).
28
Basic Operation Procedure
Note
When you hold the camcorder by the grip, support it
from underneath with your left hand.
Recording (Full Auto mode)
6
Press the FULL AUTO button so that
the button indicator lights.
Full Auto mode is turned on, TLCS (Total
Level Control System) (page 102) is
activated, Auto Iris, AGC (Auto Gain
Control), Auto Shutter, and ATW (Auto
Tracing White) are set to ON, then,
consequently the brightness and white
balance will always be adjusted
automatically.
When you wish to adjust them manually, turn
Full Auto mode off, and see;
“Iris” on page 33
“Gain” on page 32
“Electronic Shutter” on page 33
“White Balance” on page 31
Note
AF (Auto Focus) is not activated by setting the
camcorder to Full Auto mode.
For information of automatic focus adjustment,
see “Focus” (page 34).
7
Press the REC START/STOP button.
You can also start recording with the REC
START button on the grip.
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press
the START/STOP button.)
The TALLY lamp lights and recording
begins.
To stop recording, press the REC
START/STOP button again.
You can also stop recording with the REC
START button on the grip.
(If you are using the IR Remote Commander, press
the START/STOP button.)
Recording stops and the camcorder enters
STBY (recording standby) mode.
Note
If you press the REC START/STOP button to start next
recording while previous data writing is not completed,
the message “Cannot Proceed” may be displayed and
recording may not start.
To prevent a switching error
The REC START/STOP button on the handle is
incorporated with the REC HOLD lever. If the
REC START/STOP button on the handle will not
be used, it is recommended to set the lever to the
HOLD position to lock the button and prevent
unintentional starting/stopping of recording if
you accidentally press the button.
To unlock the button, return the lever to its
original position.
On holding the handle
When shooting by holding the handle, hold the
front end of the handle to keep the camcorder
steady.
9
Press the REC REVIEW button.
The Rec Review function (page 39) is
activated, and the last recorded clip is played
back for the specified time on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen.
To delete clips
You can delete the last recorded clip by using the
Last Clip DEL function (page 53). Use the All
Clips DEL function (page 53) to delete all
recorded clips from an SxS memory card. To
specify a clip to be deleted, operate the camcorder
from the thumbnail screen (page 79).
Recording
8
Checking the last recorded clip (Rec
Review)
Clip (recording data)
When you stop recording, video, audio and
subsidiary data from the start to end of the
recording are recorded as a single clip on an
SxS memory card.
Clip name
For each clip recorded with this camcorder, a
clip name is automatically generated according
to the method selected with “Auto Naming” in
“Clip” (page 122) of the OTHERS menu.
The default setting of “Auto Naming” is “Plan.”
With this setting, a clip name defined in
planning metadata is applied if a planning
metadata file is loaded into the camcorder.
Change the “Auto Naming” setting to “Title” to
apply a clip name composed of 4 to 46
alphanumerics and 4 numerics.
Example: ABCD0001
The block of 4 to 46 alphanumerics can be
specified as desired using “Clip” in the
OTHERS menu before you start recording. (It
cannot be changed after recording.)
The value of the 4 numerics is automatically
counted up in sequence.
Notes on Clips
The maximum file size for a clip is 43 GB for
UDF and exFAT, 4 GB for FAT HD Mode, and
2 GB for FAT SD Mode. If you continue
recording for an extended period, recorded
materials may be segmented into multiple files,
depending on the file size (the maximum
number of partitions is 99). The camcorder
regards continuous recording as one clip even if
it has been segmented into multiple files in FAT
mode.
Basic Operation Procedure
29
A long clip can be recorded crossing over two
memory cards in slot A and B.
When you copy recorded clips to a hard disk,
etc., via computer, it is recommended to use the
dedicated application software, which you need
to download, to maintain the continuity of
recorded materials. For details, see “Software
Downloads” (page 174).
Note
If copying is done using Explorer (Windows) or
Finder (MAC), the continuity and relationships of
recorded materials may not be maintained.
Recording
Maximum duration of a clip
The maximum clip length is 24 hours for FAT
(MP4 or AVI) and 6 hours for UDF (MXF) and
exFAT (MXF).
If you exceed the maximum clip length, a new
clip will be automatically created. You can
check the new clip on the thumbnail screen.
Changing Basic Settings
You can make changes to the settings based on
the intended usage of the recorded video or
recording conditions.
Video Formats
Selectable formats vary depending on the UDF/
exFAT/FAT, HD Mode/SD Mode, and usage
region (NTSC Area/PAL Area) settings.
You can change the usage area by setting “Country”
in “System” (page 121) of the OTHERS menu.
Switching between UDF/exFAT/FAT
Switch by setting “F.Sys.” in “System” (page
121) of the OTHERS menu.
After switching this setting, the camcorder will
automatically restart.
Note
UDF/exFAT/FAT cannot be switched during recording
or playback.
Switching between HD Mode/SD Mode
For HD/SD switching, use “System” (page 121)
of the OTHERS menu.
After switching this setting, the camcorder will
automatically restart.
Note
HD/SD switching is disabled during recording and
playback.
Switching between XAVC/MPEG2
For XAVC/MPEG2 switching, use “System”
(page 121) of the OTHERS menu.
“XAVC/MPEG2” can be selected only when
“F.Sys.” of the OTHERS menu is set to “exFAT”
and “HD/SD” of the OTHERS menu is set to
“HD.”
Note
XAVC/MPEG2 switching is disabled during recording
and playback.
30
Changing Basic Settings
Changing the format
To change the format, use “Format” in “System”
(page 121) of the OTHERS menu.
Signals from the SDI OUT, A/V OUT, and HDMI
OUT connectors are also output according to the
format selected with this menu.
ND Filter
White Balance
You can select the adjustment mode according to
the shooting conditions.
Preset mode
The color temperature is adjusted to the preset
value (factory setting: 3200K) in this mode.
Select this mode when there is no time to adjust
the white balance or when you wish to fix the
white balance to the condition of you set for a
Picture Profile.
Memory A mode, Memory B mode
The white balance is adjusted to the value stored
in memory A or memory B.
Pressing the WHITE BAL button executes auto
white balance and stores the adjusted value in
memory A or memory B.
When the Wi-Fi remote commander is used and
the ATW function is set to off, the adjusted value
is changed to the one in memory A, irrespective
of the status of the WHITE BAL switch.
ATW (Auto-Tracing White balance) mode
In this mode, the camcorder automatically adjusts
the white balance to the appropriate condition.
When the color temperature of the light source
changes, the white balance adjustment is
automatically executed.
Five steps of adjustment speed can be selected
with “ATW Speed” (page 102) of the CAMERA
SET menu.
When the ATW Hold function is assigned to an
assignable button (page 40), you can
momentarily hold the ATW value to fix the white
Note
Under some conditions of lighting or the shooting
subject, adjustment by ATW may fail to provide proper
colors.
Examples:
• When the subject of a substantially single color like
sky, sea, ground, grass, or certain kinds of flowers
occupies most of the frame area.
• When the subject is under a light source of extremely
high or extremely low color temperature.
If execution of automatic tracing by the ATW function
takes an unacceptably long time or only results in an
inadequate effect, then execute the AWB function.
Using the switch
Make a selection with the WHITE BAL switch
(page 11).
B: ATW mode or Memory B mode
A: Memory A mode
PRST: Preset mode
The B position of the WHITE BAL switch is
assigned to ATW mode at the factory. The setting
can be changed with “White Switch <B>” (page
102) of the CAMERA SET menu to select
Memory B mode.
Setting the camcorder to Full Auto mode (page
28) forcibly activates ATW mode.
Assigning the ATW on/off function to an
assignable button (page 40) permits you to
independently activate/deactivate ATW when
Full Auto mode is off.
Recording
ND filters are available for keeping the aperture
in a proper range.
2: 1/64ND
1: 1/8ND
CLEAR: ND filter not used
balance, even in ATW mode, by pressing the
button.
Using the Direct menu
When you press the DISPLAY button (page 10),
the current adjustment mode and color
temperature are displayed on the screen (page
14).
ATW: ATW mode
W:A: Memory A mode
W:B: Memory B mode
W:P: Preset mode
When the Direct menu (page 16) is in All mode,
you can select from among ATW, W:A, W:B, and
W:P.
When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you can
switch between ATW and the mode set with the
WHITE BAL switch.
When W:NS is displayed, switching via the
Direct menu is not possible.
Changing Basic Settings
31
Executing Auto White Balance
Changing the zebra pattern
1
To store the adjustment value in
memory, select Memory A or Memory
B mode.
Using “Zebra” (page 110) in the LCD/VF SET
menu, you can change the zebra pattern to be
displayed.
2
Place a white subject under the same
lighting condition and zoom in on it so
that a white area is obtained on the
screen.
3
Recording
Press the WHITE BAL button (page 8).
When you execute the adjustment in a memory
mode, the adjusted value is stored in memory (A
or B) selected in step 1.
When you execute the adjustment in ATW mode,
adjustment in ATW is resumed.
Notes
• Auto white balance adjustment cannot be performed
when in Preset mode.
• If auto white balance adjustment fails, an error
message is displayed on the screen for approximately
3 seconds. If the error message continues to be
displayed after several attempts, consult your Sony
service representative.
Selecting the gain with the switch
The gain value at each of the GAIN switch (page
11) positions set at the factory are as follows:
L: 0 dB
M: 9 dB
H: 18 dB
These values can be changed in the range of
–3 dB to +18 dB, using the CAMERA SET
menu’s Gain Setup menu (page 96).
Note
You cannot select a fixed gain when AGC mode is set to
On.
During recording, various markers and zebra
patterns can be inserted into the image on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen.
This does not affect recording signals.
Selecting gain using the Direct menu
When you press the DISPLAY button (page 10),
the current gain value is displayed on the screen
(page 14).
When the Direct menu is in All mode, you can
change the gain in steps of 3 dB with the Direct
menu.
You can also select AGC mode with the Direct
menu.
When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you can
switch between only AGC mode and the gain
selected with the GAIN switch.
Displaying the Markers
Recording in AGC Mode
Use “Marker” (page 110) of the LCD/VF SET
menu.
The gain of the video amplifier is automatically
adjusted according to the picture brightness.
When you set the camcorder to Full Auto mode
(page 28), AGC mode is forcibly selected.
When Full Auto mode is off, you can
independently turn AGC mode on by setting
“AGC” in “TLCS” (page 102) of the CAMERA
SET menu to “On,” or selecting “AGC” with the
Direct menu.
Markers/Zebra Patterns
Displaying the Zebra Patterns
A zebra pattern(s) can be inserted to the picture
on LCD monitor/EVF screen to check the
appropriate luminance level.
Pressing the ZEBRA button (ASSIGN 1 button)
(page 11) turns the zebra pattern-indication on/
off.
32
Recording with Fixed Gain
You can change the gain of the video amplifier.
Adjust the brightness.
Adjust Iris as instructed in “Adjusting the
brightness manually” (page 33) below.
4
Gain
Changing Basic Settings
Electronic Shutter
Recording with a fixed shutter
Set the shutter speed (cache time).
When you set the SHUTTER switch (page 11) to
ON, the fixed shutter is turned on in the mode and
with the shutter speed you specified with
“Shutter” (page 96) of the CAMERA SET menu.
Shooting in Auto Shutter Mode
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted
according to the picture brightness.
When you set the camcorder to Full Auto mode
(page 28), Auto Shutter is forcibly selected.
When Full Auto mode is off, you can
independently turn Auto Shutter mode on by
setting “Auto Shutter” in “TLCS” (page 102) of
the CAMERA SET menu to “On.”
Notes
Setting with the CAMERA SET menu
The shutter mode and shutter speed can be set
with “Shutter” (page 96) of the CAMERA SET
menu.
Setting with the Direct menu
When you press the DISPLAY button, the current
shutter mode and the set value are displayed
(page 14).
When the Direct menu (page 16) is in All mode,
you can change the shutter mode and speed with
the Direct menu.
Notes
• When the Direct menu is in Part mode, you cannot turn
the shutter off with the Direct menu if the SHUTTER
switch is set to ON.
If the SHUTTER switch is set to OFF, you can switch
only between Auto Shutter and Shutter OFF.
• The Direct menu cannot be selected when Full Auto
mode is turned on (page 28) or when the SLS/EX SLS
mode is set.
Shooting in SLS/EX SLS Mode
The shutter speed is specified in the number of
accumulated frames. Up to 64 frames can be
accumulated in this mode, permitting you to
obtain low-noise clear pictures in low light levels
or surreal pictures with afterimages.
For SLS/EX SLS, specify the number of
accumulated frames with “SLS/EX SLS” (page
97) of the CAMERA SET menu. You can select
from 2 to 8, 16, 32, 64 frames.
When SLS/EX SLS is ON, you cannot set Full
Auto mode (page 28).
When Full Auto mode (page 28) is on or Auto
Shutter mode is on, and SLS/EX SLS is set to on,
Full Auto mode or Auto Shutter mode is
canceled.
Iris
Adjust the brightness according to the subject.
Recording in auto mode
Recording
• When Auto Shutter mode is on, the fixed shutter
cannot be selected.
• When the SLS/EX SLS mode (page 33) is on, the fixed
shutter cannot be selected.
When Full Auto mode (page 28) is set to on:
Iris is forcibly set to Auto mode.
When Full Auto mode is set to off:
When the IRIS switch is set to AUTO, Auto Iris
mode is set.
You can select the target level (to make the
picture darker or brighter) for Auto Iris via the
Setup menu or Direct menu. (The gain control in
AGC mode and the shutter speed control in Auto
Shutter mode are adjusted in synchronization.)
To adjust the target level with the Setup menu
Set “Level” in “TLCS” (page 102) of the
CAMERA SET menu.
To adjust the target level with the Direct menu
The target level can also be selected using the
Direct menu (page 16). When you press the
DISPLAY button, the current Exposure position
is displayed on the screen (page 14).
Adjusting the brightness manually
When Full Auto mode is set to off, setting the
IRIS switch to MANUAL sets to Manual Iris
mode. Rotate the iris ring for the desired iris
opening.
Switching to Auto Iris mode temporary
By pressing the assignable button to which “One
Push Auto Iris” is assigned during Manual Iris
mode, the One Push Auto Iris function is
activated. The One Push Auto Iris function is
activated while pressing the button. When the
button is released, the camcorder returns to
Manual Iris mode.
Changing Basic Settings
33
Zoom
When using a lens remote controller
Operating Zoom manually
Zooming can also be controlled from an optional
lens remote controller connected via the LENS
REMOTE connector.
Setting the ZOOM switch (page 13) on the
bottom of the camcorder to the MANUAL
position sets to manual zoom mode.
Using the Power Zoom
Recording
The power zoom lever (page 13) on the grip and
the on-handle ZOOM button (page 10) are
activated.
The supplied IR Remote Commander and
optional lens remote control unit can also be used.
Setting the ZOOM switch on the bottom of the
camcorder to the SERVO position sets to power
zoom mode.
The current zoom position is displayed on the
screen in the range of 0 (Wide) to 99 (Tele) when
you press the DISPLAY button.
The numerical indication can be changed to that
in a bar by changing “Zoom Position” in “Display
On/Off” (page 110) of the LCD/VF SET menu.
To adjust with the power zoom lever on the grip
Pressing the lever deeper sets zooming faster.
To adjust with the on-handle ZOOM button
You can select the zoom speed with “Handle
Zoom” (page 98) of the CAMERA SET menu.
The “Vari” setting enables faster zoom speed the
deeper the on-handle ZOOM button is pressed as
in the case of the power zoom lever on the grip.
The zoom speed assignment can be changed with
“Zoom Speed” (page 98) of the CAMERA SET
menu.
You can select Soft mode for zooming by using
“Zoom Transition” (page 98) of the CAMERA
SET menu, in which the zooming speed is
gradually increased at the beginning then
gradually decreased for the end.
When adjusting with the ZOOM button of the IR
Remote Commander
The zooming speed depends on the “Remote”
(page 98) setting in “Zoom Speed” of the
CAMERA SET menu.
To use the IR Remote Commander, see “Using the IR
Remote Commander” (page 21).
34
Changing Basic Settings
For operation, refer to the operation guide of the lens
remote controller.
Focus
The infinity (∞ ) position has some margin to
compensate for focus change caused by variation
in ambient temperature. When shooting an image
at infinity in MF mode, adjust the focus while
observing the image on the LCD monitor/EVF
screen.
Adjusting in Full MF Mode
Pull the focus ring rearward (toward the
camcorder body) to set the camcorder to Full MF
mode. Focus can only be adjusted with the focus
ring manually.
Note
The focus instantly moves to the range index position
when you pull the focus ring rearward.
Rotate the focus ring for the best focus while
observing the picture on the LCD monitor/EVF
screen.
The range index of the focus ring is effective in
Full MF mode. The distances correspond to the
focus ring positions.
Focus Magnifier
When you press the FOCUS MAG button, the
center area of the picture is magnified on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen, making the focus
adjustment easier.
Press the FOCUS MAG button again or leave the
focus ring unmoved for 5 seconds to resume the
normal angle for recording.
Peaking
When you press the PEAKING button (ASSIGN
2 button), the peaking function is activated. This
function emphasizes the contours of the images
on the LCD monitor/EVF screen, making manual
focusing easier.
This function does not affect recording signals.
The emphasis level and color of the contours can
be set with “Peaking” (page 109) of the LCD/VF
SET menu.
Adjusting in MF Mode
Steady Shot
MF (Manual Focus) mode allows you to activate
Auto Focus momentarily when required.
Slide the focus ring forward (to lens hood side),
then set the FOCUS switch (page 11) to
MANUAL.
In this mode, expanded focus function, peaking
function, one-push auto focus function, and the
MF Assist function are activated.
Rotate the focus ring while looking at the LCD
monitor/EVF screen to adjust the focus.
Press the STEADY SHOT button on the
lens.
One-Push (Momentary) Auto Focusing
When you press the PUSH AUTO button, auto
focusing momentarily activates. One-Push Auto
Focusing is terminated when the subject comes
into focus.
If the camcorder is fixed to a tripod for stable
condition, deactivate the Steady Shot function.
Adjusting in AF Mode
AF (Auto Focus) mode adjusts the focus
automatically.
Slide the focus ring forward, then set the FOCUS
switch to AUTO.
Using Macro Mode
When you set the MACRO switch to ON in AF or
MF mode, Macro mode is activated, permitting
you to adjust the focus in a range that includes the
macro area.
The Macro mode is invalid in Full MF mode.
Pressing the button turns the Steady Shot function
on or off.
The setting of the Steady Shot function is
displayed in the EVF screen.
Note
Recording
MF Assist function
If you set “MF Assist” (page 97) of the
CAMERA SET menu to “On” to enable the MF
Assist function, auto focusing is engaged when
you stop rotating the lens operation ring,
performing fine focus adjustment for the subject
in the center of the screen. When the fine
adjustment is completed, automatic focusing with
the MF Assist function is terminated.
You can also enable the MF Assist function via
the Direct menu (page 16). When you press the
DISPLAY button, the selected focus mode is
displayed on the screen (page 14). The Direct
menu cannot be selected in a mode other than MF
mode.
By activating the Steady Shot function, blurring
of images due to camera shaking can be reduced.
Flickers
Setting the shutter speed according to
the power-supply frequency
Activate the electronic shutter (page 33) and set
the shutter speed according to the power supply
frequency.
When the frequency is 50 Hz
Set the shutter speed to 1/50 or 1/100 seconds.
When the frequency is 60 Hz
Set the shutter speed to 1/60 or 1/120 seconds.
Using the Flicker-Reduction function
Set “Mode” in “Flicker Reduce” (page 97) of the
CAMERA SET menu to “Auto” or “On” and set
“Frequency” to the power-supply frequency (50
Hz or 60 Hz).
Note
If the frame rate selected for recording is close to the
power-supply frequency, flicker may not be reduced
sufficiently even if you activate the Flicker-Reduction
function. In such cases, use the electronic shutter.
Changing Basic Settings
35
Time Data
Recording Audio Signals
Setting the Timecode
Specify the timecode to be recorded with
“Timecode” and “TC Format” of the TC/UB SET
menu (page 112).
Setting the Users Bit
Recording
You can add a hexadecimal number of 8 digits for
pictures as the user bits.
The user bits can also be set to the current date.
Use “Users Bit” (page 112) of the TC/UB SET
menu.
Four channels (CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4) of audio
can be recorded (Linear PCM recording) in
synchronization with video recording.
You can use the built-in stereo microphones
(omni-directional electret condenser
microphones) or 2-channel external audio inputs
to the AUDIO IN connectors by switching with
the AUDIO IN switches.
Using the Built-in Stereo
Microphones
Displaying the Time Data
Pressing the DISPLAY button displays the time
data on the screen (page 14).
The indication is switched among the timecode,
user bits, and recording duration each time you
press the DURATION/TC/U-BIT button (page
10).
Display
Set the AUDIO IN switches, both CH-1 and
CH-2 (page 11), to INT.
Using External Inputs
1
Set the CH-1 and CH-2 AUDIO IN
switches (page 11) to EXT.
2
Connect external audio sources to the
AUDIO IN connectors CH-1 and CH-2
(page 9).
3
Set “CH1 EXT Input” and “CH2 EXT
Input” in “Audio Input” of the AUDIO
SET menu to “XLR” (page 104).
4
Set the input (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V)
switches CH-1 and CH-2 (page 9) to
LINE (line level: +4 dBu).
Contents
TCG **:**:**:** Timecode
CLK **:**:**:** Timecode (Clock mode)
UBG ** ** ** ** User bits
DUR **:**:**
Duration from the beginning of
recording
Note
When using XLR input connector, set “CH1 EXT Input”
or “CH2 EXT Input” in “Audio Input” of the AUDIO
SET menu to “XLR”.
Using an External Microphone
You can use an external microphone for
recording, such as the ECM-673 Electret
Condenser Microphone.
1
36
Recording Audio Signals
Lift up the handle of the external
microphone holder (page 9) and open
the cover.
2
Attach a microphone, then return the
external microphone holder cover to its
original position to secure it.
3
Connect the microphone cable to the
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors.
External
microphone
Cable
clamp
4
Set the corresponding AUDIO IN
switch (CH-1/CH-2) (page 11) to EXT.
5
Set “CH1 EXT Input” and “CH2 EXT
Input” in “Audio Input” of the AUDIO
SET menu to “XLR” (page 104).
6
Set the corresponding input (LINE/
MIC/MIC+48V) switch (CH-1/CH-2)
(page 9) according to the connected
microphone.
MIC: For a microphone that requires no
power supply
MIC +48V: For a microphone that requires
+48V power supply (such as the ECM673)
Note
When using XLR input connector, set “CH1 EXT Input”
or “CH2 EXT Input” in “Audio Input” of the AUDIO
SET menu to “XLR”.
Using a microphone compatible with the Multi
Interface Shoe
1
2
Set the CH-1 and CH-2 AUDIO IN
switches to EXT.
Attach a microphone to the Multi
Interface Shoe
Set “CH1 EXT Input” and “CH2 EXT
Input” in “Audio Input” of the AUDIO
SET menu to “SHOE MIC” (page 104).
Notes
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Proxy,”
no power is supplied to the microphone. When a
wireless microphone UWP-D11/D12 is attached to the
camcorder, set “NW&Proxy/USB” to options other
than “Network&Proxy.”
• When “CH1 EXT Input” and “CH2 EXT Input” in
“Audio Input” of the AUDIO SET menu are set to
“SHOE MIC,” the settings for the CH-1 and CH-2
input (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switches are disabled.
Any position is set to equivalent to MIC.
Adjusting the Audio Recording
Levels
Recording
to AUDIO IN
3
To adjust the levels automatically (AGC)
When the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and
CH-2 (page 11) are set to AUTO, the audio
recording levels are automatically adjusted.
To adjust the levels manually
Set the AUDIO SELECT switches CH-1 and CH2 to MANUAL and adjust the audio recording
levels by turning the AUDIO LEVEL knobs
(page 11).
Set the controls to 5 for the reference setting (0
dB). Setting to 10 maximizes the level (+12 dB),
and setting to 0 minimizes it (–∞ ).
The input levels are displayed on the screen when
you press the DISPLAY button (page 14).
Audio recording in special recording
modes
No audio recording is made in Interval Recording
or Frame Recording.
No audio recording is made in Slow & Quick
recording if the recording frame rate is set to a
value different from the playback frame rate.
Monitoring the Audio
You can monitor the sounds being recorded with
the headphones connected to the headphone
connector (stereo mini jack) (page 8).
Recording Audio Signals
37
Note
The built-in speaker is disabled during recording (or
when standing by to record).
To adjust the audio monitoring volume
Use the VOLUME buttons (page 10).
Useful Functions
Color Bars/Reference Tone
Recording
By setting “Camera/Bars” in “Color Bars” (page
97) of the CAMERA SET menu to “Bars,” you
can output a color-bar signal in place of the
camera picture. When this item is set to
“Camera,” the output returns to the camera
picture.
A 1-kHz reference tone is output with the color
bar signal if “1KHz Tone” in “Audio Input” (page
104) of the AUDIO SET menu is set to “On.”
The color-bar signal and reference-tone signal are
also fed out from the SDI OUT, HDMI OUT,
i.LINK, VIDEO OUT (color bars only), and A/V
OUT connectors.
You can select the type of color bars with “Bars
Type” in “Color Bars” of the CAMERA SET
menu.
Notes
• The color bar mode cannot be output in Slow & Quick
Motion mode and SLS/EX SLS mode.
• You cannot switch to “Color Bars” while recording.
(Switching from “Color Bars” to “Camera” is
available.)
Shot Marks
When you record shot marks for important scenes
of a clip recorded in UDF, exFAT, or FAT HD
Mode as subsidiary data, you can access the
marked points easily on a Shot Mark screen (page
87), which only displays scenes with shot marks
only. This increases editing efficiency.
The camcorder permits you to record two types of
shot marks: shot mark 1 and shot mark 2.
Shot marks can be recorded as needed during
recording or can be added after recording while
checking the playback pictures on the thumbnail
screen.
Inserting a shot mark during recording
If the Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2 function is
assigned to an assignable button (page 40), press
the button where you want to insert a shot mark.
38
Useful Functions
For operations to add shot marks after recording,
see “Adding Shot Marks During Playback (UDF,
exFAT, and FAT HD Mode)” on page 82 and
“Adding/Deleting Shot Marks (UDF, exFAT, and
FAT HD Mode)” on page 88.
For operation to apply a name to a shot mark, see
“Defining Shot Mark names in Planning Metadata”
on page 56.
Adding the OK mark
When recording of a clip ends, press the
assignable button to which you assigned the
OK Mark function.
While standing by to record, you can also add an
OK mark to the last-recorded clip (“Last Clip”)
on the selected memory card.
Deleting the OK mark
You can add OK/NG/KP flags to clips recorded
with UDF or exFAT. By adding flags, you can set
the camcorder to display only clips with certain
flag settings on the thumbnail screen “OK/NG/
KP/None-Clip thumbnail screen” (page 80).
Press the assignable button to which you
assigned the OK Mark function, and select
“Execute.”
Note
Use the “Lock Clip” setting (page 83) to protect clips.
Adding a flag
During recording or playback, press the
assignable button to which you assigned the
Clip Flag OK/Clip Flag NG/Clip Flag Keep
function.
You can add an OK/NG/KP flag to a clip during
recording or playback.
Deleting a flag
Press the assignable button, twice in
succession, to which you assigned the Clip
Flag OK/Clip Flag NG/Clip Flag Keep
function.
You can delete the OK/NG/KP flag from a clip.
OK/NG/KP flags can also be added and deleted from
the thumbnail screen. For details, see “Adding/
Deleting a Flag (UDF and exFAT)” (page 85).
OK Mark (FAT HD Mode Only)
By adding the OK mark to a clip recorded in FAT
HD Mode, you can prevent the clip from being
deleted or divided inadvertently. You can also set
the camcorder to display only clips with the OK
mark on the thumbnail screen “OK-Clip
thumbnail screen” (page 80).
While standing by to record, you can also delete
the OK mark from the clip with the last-added OK
mark.
Recording
OK/NG/KP Flags (UDF and exFAT)
Adding or deleting the OK mark to or from
clips before the last one
Make changes via the thumbnail screen.
For details on making settings, see “Adding/Deleting
the OK Mark (FAT HD Mode Only)” (page 85).
Rec Review
You can review the last recorded clip on the
screen (Rec Review).
Press the REC REVIEW button (page 13)
after recording is finished.
If the Rec Review function is assigned to an
assignable button (page 40), you can also use that
button.
The last 3 seconds, 10 seconds, or the entire part
of the clip is displayed, depending on the “Rec
Review” setting (page 102) of the CAMERA
SET menu.
Rec Review is terminated at the end of the clip,
resuming STBY (recording standby) status.
To interrupt Rec Review
Press the REC REVIEW or STOP/CAM button
or the assignable button to which you assigned the
Rec Review function.
Notes
• During Rec Review playback, the playback control
buttons other than the STOP/CAM button are disabled.
• If the video format was changed after recording, Rec
Review cannot be performed (except when the change
Useful Functions
39
was from SP 1440×1080/23.98P to SP 1440×1080/
59.94i).
• The Setup and PICTURE PROFILE menus cannot be
operated during Rec Review.
Assignable Buttons
The camcorder has five assignable buttons (page
11) to which you can assign various functions for
convenience.
Recording
To change functions
Use “Assign Button” (page 119) of the OTHERS
menu.
The assigned functions can be viewed on the
“Button/Remote Status Screen” (page 90).
Interval Recording
The Interval Recording (time-lapse recording)
function is especially effective for shooting
objects that move very slowly.
The specified number of frames are automatically
recorded at the specified intervals.
Recording interval (Interval Time)
Mode and FAT HD Mode) or “SP 1440×1080/23.98P”
(in FAT HD Mode).
• Interval Recording mode cannot be used when the
items “DVCAM” or “HDV” are set for “SDI/HDMI/
i.LINK I/O Select” (page 106) of the VIDEO SET
menu, and the video format of “Format” in “System”
(page 121) of the OTHERS menu is set to other than
“HQ mode/23.98P.”
Preparatory settings
Before starting Interval Recording, make the
necessary settings of the CAMERA SET menu
(page 98) in advance.
When the video light compatible with the Multi
Interface Shoe is mounted, you can set “PreLighting” in “Interval Rec” of the CAMERA SET
menu to “On” so that the light turns on
automatically approximately 2 seconds before
recording.
Notes
• While “Pre-Lighting” is set to “On”, the video light
remains on with “Interval Time” set to “3sec” or less,
even if “Rec Link” or “Rec Link + Stby” in “Video
Light Set” is set.
• While “Pre-Lighting” is set to “Off,” the video light
remains off, even if you start recording with “Rec
Link” in “Video Light Set” set. If “Rec Link + Stby” in
“Video Light Set” is set, the video light remains dimlylit.
Performing Interval Recording
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Notes
Number of frames for one recording session
(Number of Frames)
It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod
or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander
to start/stop recording rather than pressing the
REC START/STOP button of the camcorder.
Notes
• Audio cannot be recorded in Interval Recording mode.
• Interval Recording cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Picture Cache
Recording, Slow & Quick Motion, Clip Continuous
Recording, Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots, or
Proxy Recording. When you set Interval Recording to
“On,” these other functions are forcibly set to “Off.”
• Interval Recording mode cannot be used when
“Format” in “System” (page 121) of the OTHERS
menu is set to “HQ 1280×720/23.98P” (in UDF HD
40
Useful Functions
• You cannot change the “Interval Time” and “Number
of Frames” settings while Interval Recording is in
progress. To change them, pause recording.
• After starting Interval Recording, Rec Review
operation is disabled, even during an interval.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode (page 112)
during Interval Recording.
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop
recording or switch the card slot while recording is
halted in Interval Recording mode.
• “Setting” for “Interval Rec” is automatically set to
“Off” when you set the power switch to OFF, while the
“Interval Time” and “Number of Frames” settings are
maintained.
Frame Recording
The Frame Recording function is especially
effective for clay animation recording.
The specified number of frames are recorded
intermittently when you press the REC START/
STOP button.
It is recommended to fix the camcorder to a tripod
or equivalent and use the IR Remote Commander
to start/stop recording rather than pressing the
REC START/STOP button of the camcorder.
Notes
Clip Continuous Recording (UDF
and exFAT)
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Clips are normally created individually for each
time you start and stop recording, but you can also
continue recording to a single clip regardless of
the number of times you start and stop recording
by using the Clip Continuous Recording function,
which will add recordings to the same clip until
the function is disabled or turned off.
This is convenient for when you do not want to
create a large number of short clips, or when you
do not want to be restricted by a maximum
number of clips.
A recording start mark is added to each point at
which you resume recording, making it easy to
search for each point.
1
Preparatory settings
Preparatory settings
Before starting Frame Recording, make the
necessary settings of the CAMERA SET menu
(page 99) in advance.
Performing Frame Recording
Press the REC START/STOP button.
When the number of frames you specified
with the menu are recorded, the camcorder
automatically enters FRM STBY (Frame Rec
Standby) status.
2
Press the REC START/STOP button
again.
Each time you press the REC START/STOP
button, the camcorder records the specified
number of frames then enters FRM STBY
status.
Notes
• Recording cannot be stopped until the specified
number of frames are recorded. If the power switch is
set to OFF during recording, the power is only shut off
after the specified number of frames are recorded.
Recording
• Audio cannot be recorded in Frame Recording mode.
• Frame Recording cannot be set to “On” simultaneously
with Interval Recording, Picture Cache Recording,
Slow & Quick Motion, Clip Continuous Recording,
Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots, or Proxy
Recording. When you set Frame Recording to “On,”
these other functions are forcibly set to “Off.”
• Frame Recording mode cannot be used when “Format”
in “System” (page 121) of the OTHERS menu is set to
“HQ 1280×720/23.98P” (in UDF HD Mode and
exFAT HD Mode) or “SP 1440×1080/23.98P” (in
FAT HD Mode).
• Frame Recording mode cannot be used when the items
“DVCAM” or “HDV” are set for “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK
I/O Select” (page 106) of the VIDEO SET menu, and
the video format of “Format” in “System” (page 121)
of the OTHERS menu is set to other than “HQ mode/
23.98P.”
• The Rec Review function cannot be used while
recording in Frame Rec mode is in progress.
• You cannot change the “Number of Frames” setting
while recording in Frame Rec mode is in progress. To
change it, pause the recording.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode (page 112)
during Frame Recording.
• Some extra frames may be recorded if you stop
recording or switch the card slot while recording is
paused in Frame Rec mode.
• “Setting” for “Frame Rec” is automatically set to “Off”
when you set the power switch to OFF, while the
“Number of Frames” setting is maintained.
• When the video light compatible with the Multi
Interface Shoe is mounted, the video light remains off
during recording, even if “Rec Link” in “Video Light
Set” is set. If “Rec Link + Stby” in “Video Light Set”
is set, the video light remains dimly-lit.
Before starting Clip Continuous Recording, make
the necessary settings to “Clip Cont. Rec” (page
99) of the CAMERA SET menu in advance.
When you set “Setting” to “On,” the Clip
Continuous Recording function is enabled, and
“CONT” appears on the screen (page 14).
You can also assign “Clip Cont. Rec” to an
assignable button (page 40), and set “Setting” to
“On”/“Off” by pressing the button.
Notes
• Clip Continuous Recording cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Picture Cache Recording, Interval
Recording, Frame Recording, Slow & Quick Motion,
or Proxy Recording. When you set Clip Continuous
Recording to “On,” these other functions are forcibly
set to “Off.”
Useful Functions
41
• Clip Continuous Recording cannot be used while
recording.
• This function cannot be used with FAT.
• While Clip Continuous Recording is set to “On,”
Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots cannot be set to
“On” during recording or standby for recording (the
“CONT” indication appears). Set Clip Continuous
Recording to “Off”, then set Simultaneous Recording
in the 2 slots to “On.”
Performing Clip Continuous Recording
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording
When recording starts, the “CONT” indication on
the screen changes to “zREC” (with z in red).
Notes
• If you remove the SxS memory card or the battery
while recording or standing by to record (the “CONT”
indication appears), the SxS memory card must be
restored. Only remove the SxS memory card after Clip
Continuous Recording is complete. If “CONT” is
flashing (1 time per second), you can remove the SxS
memory card.
• Record for at least 2 seconds before you stop
recording.
To disable Clip Continuous Recording mode
While standing by to record, set “Setting” in
“Clip Cont. Rec” (page 99) of the CAMERA SET
menu to “Off.”
Restricted Operations
If you perform any of the following operations
while recording or standing by to record, 1
continuous clip will not be created. The next time
you start recording, a new clip will be created.
• Performing clip operations (locking, deleting,
or changing the names of clips).
• Switching the memory card slot.
• Changing the recording format.
• Setting the power switch to OFF.
• Displaying the thumbnail screen.
• Playing clips.
Picture Cache Recording:
Retroactively Record
When the Picture Cache Recording function is
active, the camcorder stores the last few seconds
of video captured in the built-in cache memory to
permit you to start recording video on an SxS
memory card from a point before you press the
42
Useful Functions
REC START/STOP button. The maximum
picture cache time is 15 seconds.
Notes
• Picture Cache Recording cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Interval
Recording, Slow & Quick Motion, Clip Continuous
Recording, or Proxy Recording. When you set Picture
Cache Recording to “On,” these functions are
forcefully disabled.
• Picture Cache Recording mode cannot be used while
recording, or while using Recording Review or Freeze
Mix.
• Picture Cache Recording is set to “Off” when you
change any of the settings in “System” (page 121) of
the OTHERS menu.
• When Picture Cache Recording is “On,” the time code
is always recorded in Free Run mode regardless of the
TC/UB SET menu settings (page 112).
• When “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS menu is
set to XAVC-I, the Picture Cache time can be set up to
4 seconds.
Preparatory settings
Before starting Picture Cache Recording, set
“P.Cache Rec” (page 99) of the CAMERA SET
menu.
“Setting” for Picture Cache Recording can also be
set to “On”/“Off” by assigning it to an assignable
button (page 40) and using that button.
When the setting has been made, the special
recording/operation status indication block on the
screen shows “zCACHE,” with z in green
(page 14).
Performing Picture Cache Recording
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Recording begins, and stored video in the cache
memory is written first to the SxS memory card.
The on-screen “zCACHE” indication changes to
“zREC” (z is red).
To cancel the Picture Cache Recording function
Set “Setting” in “P.Cache Rec” of the CAMERA
SET menu to “Off” or press the assignable button
to which you assigned the Picture Cache function.
Notes
• If you change the recording format, the cached data are
cleared and caching is newly started. Therefore, data
cached before you changed the format cannot be
recorded if you start Picture Cache Recording
immediately after changing the format.
• If you start/stop Picture Cache Recording immediately
after you insert an SxS memory card, data may not be
recorded on the card.
Slow & Quick Motion
When the camcorder is in UDF HD Mode, exFAT
HD Mode, or FAT HD Mode and the video
format (page 121) is set to one of the following
settings, you can set the recording frame rate and
playback frame rate to different values.
NTSC Area
HD422 50/1080/29.97P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P
HD422 50/720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/29.97P
HD422 50/720/23.98P
XAVC-I 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P
XAVC-I 720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 720/59.94P
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/29.97P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P (FAT HD Mode only)
PAL Area
HD422 50/1080/25P
HD422 50/720/50P
HD422 50/720/25P
XAVC-I 1080/25P
XAVC-L50 1080/25P
XAVC-L35 1080/25P
XAVC-I 720/50P
XAVC-L50 720/50P
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HQ 1280×720/25P
Notes
• Slow & Quick Motion recording cannot be used in SD
Mode.
• Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set to “On”
simultaneously with Frame Recording, Interval
Recording, Picture Cache Recording, Clip Continuous
Recording, Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots, or
Proxy Recording. When you set Slow & Quick Motion
to “On,” these other functions are forcibly set to “Off.”
• Slow & Quick Motion mode cannot be used while
recording, or while using Recording Review or Freeze
Mix.
• Slow & Quick Motion mode cannot be used when
“SLS/EX SLS” (page 97) of the CAMERA SET menu
is set to other than “OFF.”
• Audio cannot be recorded when the recording and
playback frame rates differ.
Recording
• Picture caching starts when you activate the Picture
Cache Recording function. Therefore, video before the
function is activated cannot be recorded with Picture
Cache Recording.
• Picture Cache Recording is invalid for external input
signal (HDV).
• As picture caching is disabled while an SxS memory
card is being accessed, such as during playback, Rec
Review, or thumbnail screen display, Picture Cache
Recording of such a period cannot be made.
• Although you can change the cache time setting while
recording, any new value becomes valid only after
recording has stopped.
• When the video light compatible with the Multi
Interface Shoe is mounted, retroactively recording
before the start of recording is not supported, even if
“Rec Link” or “Rec Link + Stby” in “Video Light Set”
is set. The video light is turned on/off when the REC
START/STOP button is pressed.
Preparatory settings
Before starting Slow & Quick Motion recording,
set “S&Q Motion” (page 100) of the CAMERA
SET menu.
When the special recording mode indication on
the screen is active, “S&Q Motion” is displayed
on the screen (page 14).
Setting the recording frame rate with the Direct
menu
When the special recording mode indication on
the screen is active, [Recording frame rate]/
[Playback frame rate fps] is displayed under
“S&Q Motion.”
You can change the recording frame rate with the
Direct menu (page 16).
Recording in Slow & Quick Motion Mode
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
Notes
• You cannot change the Frame Rate settings while Slow
& Quick Motion recording is in progress. To change
them, pause the recording.
• The timecode is recorded in Rec Run mode during
Slow & Quick Motion recording (page 112).
• When recording at a low-speed frame rate, it may take
time until recording stops after you press the REC
START/STOP button.
• Slow & Quick Motion mode is automatically set to
“Off” when you set the camcorder’s power switch to
OFF. However, the Frame Rate setting is saved.
Useful Functions
43
Simultaneous Recording in the 2
slots
Simultaneous recording is available using both
memory card A and B.
Preparatory settings
Before starting Simultaneous Recording in the 2
slots, set “Simul Rec” in the CAMERA SET
menu to “Simul” (page 101).
Notes
Recording
• When using Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots, use
memory cards with the same type and size.
• SDHC cards are not supported for using Simultaneous
Recording in 2 slots.
Compatible media
SxS PRO+ Series
SxS PRO Series
SxS-1 Series
XQD Memory Card Series
Compatible format
When any of the following formats for the exFAT
HD mode is set in “System” of the OTHERS
• XAVC-I
• XAVC-L50
• XAVC-L35
• XAVC-L25
For details, refer to “Video Format (Format)” (page
138).
Recording in Simultaneous Recording in
the 2 slots mode
When the preparatory settings are completed, you
can start recording.
Press the REC START/STOP button.
The operations of recording start/stop are the
same as those of normal recording.
Notes
• Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots cannot be set to
“On” simultaneously with the following functions.
—Frame Recording,
—Slow & Quick Motion,
—Interval Recording
—Proxy Recording
—Network connection (NW&Proxy/USB is set to
Network&Proxy)
—Streaming
44
Useful Functions
• Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots cannot be set
while recording, playing back or displaying thumbnail
screen.
• When the video light compatible with the Multi
Interface Shoe is mounted and a combination of
Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots and the Picture
Cache Recording function is used, retroactively
recording before the start of recording is not supported,
even if “Rec Link” or “Rec Link + Stby” in “Video
Light Set” is set. The video light is turned on/off when
the REC START/STOP button is pressed.
• When a memory card in one slot becomes full, if a
memory card in the other slot is recordable, recording
continues as normal recording. When you switch the
memory card during continuous recording as normal
recording, simultaneous recording or relay recording is
not available.
• When you start recording with Simultaneous
Recording in the 2 slots, if only one memory card is
inserted in either of slots or one of memory cards is
full, recording starts in a recordable memory card.
• When using Simultaneous Recording in 2 slots with
Clip Continuous Recording or Interval Recording,
follow the operations for Clip Continuous Recording
or Interval Recording.
Freeze Mix: Image Alignment
In UDF HD Mode, exFAT Mode, or FAT HD
Mode, an image (still picture) of a recorded clip
can be temporarily superimposed on the current
camera picture, permitting you to easily align
images for your next recording.
To use the Freeze Mix function
Assign the Freeze Mix function to one of the
assignable buttons in advance (page 40).
Superimposing a Freeze Mix image
While recording or reviewing images by pressing
the REC REVIEW button, press the ASSIGN
button to which you assigned “Freeze Mix” at the
image with which you want to align. The image is
displayed as a still picture over the current camera
picture.
Canceling Freeze Mix status
You can cancel it with the ASSIGN button to
which you assigned “Freeze Mix” or the REC
START/STOP button.
When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing
the ASSIGN button, the normal camera picture is
displayed.
When you cancel Freeze Mix status by pressing
the REC START/STOP button, normal recording
begins.
Notes
Automatic Adjustment of Flange
Focal Length
When automatic adjustment of flange focal
length is activated, focusing is performed both at
the wide-angle and telephoto ends of the zoom for
flange focal length adjustment and the result is
stored so that the in-focus condition is maintained
even if you change the zoom position after
focusing.
Notes
• If a subject of insufficient contrast is used, or if the
camcorder or subject moves during the adjustment,
adjustment cannot be made properly. Once the
adjustment begins, do not touch the camcorder body or
lens until it ends.
• Set “SLS/EX SLS” of the CAMERA SET menu to
“OFF” before starting the adjustment.
• Be careful that no light source, such as a lamp, the sun,
or a bright window, is in field of view during flange
focal length adjustment.
• Contact your dealer if a flange focal length adjustment
chart is required.
1
Set the power switch to ON.
2
Set the ND FILTER switch to CLEAR.
3
Place a high-contrast subject, such as a
flange focal length adjustment chart,
about 3 m (10 ft.) away from the
camcorder, and light it well enough to
provide a sufficient video output level.
4
Set the ZOOM switch on the bottom of
the camcorder to SERVO (Power Zoom
mode).
5
Set “Auto FB Adjust” of the CAMERA
SET menu to “Execute” in the setup
menu, then press the SEL/SET button
or the jog dial.
The adjustment begins.
During adjustment, the in-progress message
is displayed.
When the adjustment finished, the
completion message is displayed.
Recording
• The Freeze Mix function cannot be used in SD Mode.
• Freeze Mix cannot be used when “Format” in
“System” (page 121) of the OTHERS menu is set to
“HQ 1280×720/23.98P” (in UDF HD Mode and
exFAT HD Mode) or “SP 1440×1080/23.98P” (in
FAT HD Mode).
• If the “Format” setting of the recorded picture and the
current camera picture differ, the Freeze Mix display
cannot be achieved.
• The Freeze Mix display cannot be obtained in Slow &
Quick Motion mode or Slow Shutter mode.
• You cannot operate the Setup menus and PICTURE
PROFILE menu in Freeze Mix status.
than the subject is out of frame at the wideangle end.
Notes
• “Auto FB Adjust” cannot be selected when the ND
filter is set to 1 or 2.
• Do not change the ND filter while “Auto FB Adjust” is
in operation.
If you press the CANCEL button during
adjustment
Automatic adjustment of the flange focal length is
aborted and the condition before starting the
adjustment is resumed.
If the adjustment fails
An error message is displayed.
Check the conditions of the subject and lighting
then perform the adjustment again.
Picture Profiles
You can customize the picture quality, depending
on the conditions or circumstances of recording,
and store settings as a picture profile, enabling
you to recall the profile as necessary.
Six different picture profiles (PP1 to PP6) can be
stored in memory.
The same standard (reference) values are
registered to six picture profiles at the factory as
those specified for the Picture Profile Off status.
Note
Picture profiles can be set while recording or standing by
to record. They cannot be operated from the thumbnail
screen.
Frame the subject so that it is located in the
center at the telephoto end of the zoom. Make
sure that any object located closer to the lens
Useful Functions
45
Registering the customized settings as a
Picture Profile
1
Set the power switch (page 8) to ON to
turn on the camcorder.
2
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button
(page 11).
The PICTURE PROFILE menu is displayed.
Recording
3
Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
the jog dial, select “SEL,” then press the
SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
4
Select the number of the picture profile
to register from the list, then press the
SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
5
Use the up/down buttons or the jog dial
to select “SET,” then press the SEL/
SET button or the jog dial.
6
Make each setting (page 47).
7
When the settings have been made,
press the PICTURE PROFILE button.
Selecting a registered Picture Profile
Once you store a picture profile, you can recall
the picture quality registered in the picture
profile.
1
While standing by to record, press the
PICTURE PROFILE button (page 11).
The PICTURE PROFILE menu is displayed.
2
Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
the jog dial, select “SEL,” then press the
SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
3
Select the number of the picture profile
to use from the list, then press the SEL/
SET button or the jog dial.
If OFF is selected, the picture quality is set to
standard and cannot be changed.
4
Press the PICTURE PROFILE button.
The picture profile being selected is displayed
when you press the DISPLAY button (page 14).
You can also select picture profiles with the
Direct menu (page 16).
46
Useful Functions
Picture Profile Items
The values when “Off” is selected at “SEL” of the PICTURE PROFILE menu are shown in bold face
(example: Standard).
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Profile Name
Set the profile name in 8 characters at maximum.
You can use upper- and lowercase alphabetics,
numerics 0 to 9, - (hyphen), _ (underscore) and
space.
Matrix
Set to “On” to activate the color phase adjustment
function with matrix operations for the entire
picture.
Adjusting the color phase
over the entire area with
matrix operations
Setting
On / Off
Notes
• When this function is set to “Off,” Multi Matrix is
also set to “Off” in synchronization.
• If color saturation occurs under lighting that
contains excessive blue components (such as blue
LED lighting), set the “Setting” of “Matrix” to
“Off” to reduce the color saturation.
Multi Matrix mode
Selecting multi-matrix
correction and color phase
adjustment for the specified
area
Select
1/2/3/4/5/6
Select the built-in preset matrix provided for
convenience.
1: Equivalent to SMPTE-240M / 2: Equivalent to
ITU-709 / 3: Equivalent to SMPTE WIDE / 4:
Equivalent to NTSC / 5: Equivalent to EBU / 6:
Equivalent to PAL
Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the color saturation for the entire picture
area.
Phase
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the hue for the entire picture area.
R-G, R-B, G-R, G-B, B-R, B-G
–99 to +99 (±0)
Finely adjust the color phase for the entire picture
area by independently setting each of the factors.
Recording
Profile name
Standard
Changing the picture profile
name
Multi Matrix / Color Correction Select the setting items of the Multi Matrix or the
setting items of the Color Correction.
Useful Functions
47
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Multi Matrix
Setting
On / Off
Makes settings related to
multi-matrix correction.
(Unselectable when “Color Area Indication1)
Correction” is selected in the
On / Off
Multi Matrix mode)
Color Detection2)
Execute/Cancel
Set to “On” to enable the multi-matrix correction,
which allows specific colors to be selected for
saturation correction in a 16-axis hue space.
Set to “On” to display a zebra pattern in the areas of
the specified color for multi-matrix correction.
Execute to detect the target color on the screen for
multi-matrix correction.
Recording
Axis
Specify a color targeted by multi-matrix correction
B / B+ /MG- / MG / MG+ / R / (16-axis mode).
R+ / YL- / YL /YL+ / G- / G /
G+ / CY / CY+ / BHue
–99 to +99 (±0)
Set the the hue of the color targeted by multi-matrix
correction for each 16-axis mode.
Saturation
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the saturation of the color targeted by multimatrix correction for each 16-axis mode.
Color Correction
Setting
On / Off
Adjusting the color phase in
a specific area (Unselectable
when “Multi Matrix” is
selected in the Multi Matrix Area Detection2)
mode)
Execute/Cancel
Area Indication1)
On / Off
Set to “On” to enable the color phase adjustment
for a specific area. (Simultaneous adjustment of
multiple areas is not allowed. You can adjust it for
one area only.)
Execute to detect the color in the center of the
screen. The area centering around the detected
color of the range specified by “Target Width”
becomes the target area of Color Correction.
Set to “On” to display the Zebra 1 pattern for the
area targeted for Color Correction.
Note
The area where the Zebra 1 pattern is displayed and
the area targeted for Color Correction, may differ.
Target Phase
0 to 359 (130)
Manually adjust the center color for the area
targeted for Color Correction.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
overwritten by the Area Detection result. Perform
fine adjustment with this item as required.
48
Useful Functions
Target Width
0 to 90 (40)
Set the width of color phase for the area targeted for
Color Correction.
Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Set the saturation for the color in the target area.
Phase
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the hue for the color in the target area.
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
White
Offset White
On / Off
Set to “On” to shift the conversion value for auto
white balance in Memory A or B mode and that for
auto tracing white in ATW mode to a lower color
temperature or a higher color temperature.
Offset<A>
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the volume of the offset white (shifting
volumes) of the conversion value in Memory A,
Memory B, or ATW mode, respectively.
Setting the white balance
offset and the color
temperature of the preset
white
Offset<B>
–99 to +99 (±0)
Offset<ATW>
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the preset color temperature when Preset
white balance mode is selected in steps of 100K.
Notes
• Except when the white balance is in Memory A
or B mode or when ATW is active, you cannot
confirm the result of changing the Offset White
and Offset settings on the screen.
• Except when Preset white balance mode is
selected, you cannot confirm the result of
changing the Preset White settings on the screen.
HD Detail
Setting
On / Off
Adjusting the details to be
applied to the picture in HD Level
Mode
–99 to +99 (±0)
Recording
Preset White
2100 to 10000 (3200)
Set to “On” to apply the details to the video signal.
Adjust the detail level.
Frequency
–99 to +99 (±0)
Set the center frequency of the details.
Setting the center frequency higher decreases the
details, and setting it lower increases the details.
Crispening
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the noise-suppression level.
When you set it to a higher level, less noise may be
seen, as fine elements of details are deleted leaving
only high-level elements.
When you set it to a lower level, fine elements are
applied while increasing noise.
H/V Ratio
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the horizontal-to-vertical ratio of detail
elements.
A higher value makes the vertical elements
increased with respect to the horizontal elements.
White Limiter
–99 to +99 (±0)
Limit the white details.
Black Limiter
–99 to +99 (±0)
Limit the black details.
V DTL Creation
NAM / Y / G / G+R
Select the source signal to generate vertical details
from among NAM (G or R whichever is higher), Y,
G, and G+R.
Knee APT Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the knee aperture level (level of details to be
applied to the sections above the knee point).
Useful Functions
49
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
SD Detail
Setting
On / Off
Set to “On” to apply the details to the video signal.
Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the detail level.
Frequency
–99 to +99 (±0)
Set the center frequency of the details.
Setting the center frequency higher decreases the
details, and setting it lower increases the details.
Crispening
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the noise-suppression level.
When you set it to a higher level, less noise may be
seen, as fine elements of details are deleted leaving
only high-level elements.
When you set it to a lower level, fine elements are
applied while increasing noise.
H/V Ratio
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the horizontal-to-vertical ratio of detail
elements.
A higher value makes the vertical elements
increased with respect to the horizontal elements.
White Limiter
–99 to +99 (±0)
Limit the white details.
Black Limiter
–99 to +99 (±0)
Limit the black details.
V DTL Creation
NAM / Y / G / G+R
Select the source signal to generate vertical details
from among NAM (G or R whichever is higher), Y,
G, and G+R.
Knee APT Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the knee aperture level (level of details to be
applied to the sections above the knee point).
Setting
On / Off
Set to “On” to enable the detail level adjustment for
specific color-phase areas.
The detail level is uniform over the entire picture
with the Off setting.
Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the skin-tone detail level.
Area Detection2)
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to detect the color in the center of
the screen. The area centering on the detected color
becomes the target area for Skin Tone Detail
control.
Area Indication1)
On / Off
Set to “On” to display the Zebra 1 pattern for the
target area for Skin Tone Detail control.
Saturation
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the color (saturation) level for Skin Tone
Detail control.
Adjusting the details to be
applied to the picture in SD
Mode
Recording
Skin Tone Detail
Adjusting the details to be
applied to the areas of a
specific color phase
Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
automatically returned to 0.
Phase
0 to 359 (130)
Adjust the center color-phase value for the target
area for Skin Tone Detail control.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, this setting is
automatically changed to the value equivalent to
that of the detected color.
50
Useful Functions
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Width
0 to 90 (40)
Adjust the width of the color phase of the target
area for Skin Tone Detail control.
Note
When Area Detection is executed, the Width
setting automatically returns to 40.
Aperture
Making settings related to
aperture correction
Adjusting the knee level
Set to “On” to enable aperture correction
(processing to improve resolution by adding highfrequency aperture signals to the video signal,
which corrects degeneration due to high-frequency
characteristics).
Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Select the level for the aperture correction.
Setting
On / Off
Set to “On” to compress the high-luminance area of
the picture.
Recording
Knee
Setting
On / Off
Notes
Knee is fixed and cannot be changed in the
following cases:
• When Gamma is set to HG1 to 4
• When the electronic shutter is in slow shutter
mode
• When EX SLS is active
White Clip
Auto Knee
On / Off
Set to “On” to automatically set the best knee
conditions according to the luminance level of the
picture.
With “Off” the knee conditions can be manually
adjusted independently of the luminance level of
the picture.
Point
50 to 109 (90)
Set the knee point when Auto Knee is “Off.”
Slope
–99 to +99 (±0)
Set the knee slope (volume of compression) when
Auto Knee is “Off.”
Knee SAT
On / Off
Set to “On” to enable the knee saturation
adjustment (level for the area over the knee point).
Knee SAT Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the knee saturation level for the area over
the knee point.
Setting
On / Off
Turns white clipping adjustment on or off.
Level
Specifies the white clip level.
When “Country” is set to other
than “PAL Area”
90.0%~109.0% (108.0%)
When “Country” is set to “PAL
Area”
90.0%~109.0% (105.0%)
Gamma
Adjusting the gamma
compensation level and
selecting the gamma curve
Level
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the gamma compensation level.
Select3)
STD1 to STD6 / HG1 to HG4
(HD: STD5, SD: STD4)
Select the type of reference curve for gamma
compensation.
Useful Functions
51
PICTURE PROFILE SET
Items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Black
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the master black level.
–99 to +99 (HD: ±0, SD: -16)
Adjust the level of black gamma function that
emphasizes only the dark areas of the picture to
clear the tones or on the contrary de-emphasizes it
to reduce noise.
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the level of the low key saturation to
heighten the colors only in the dark areas of the
picture or pale them to reduce noise.
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to copy.
Adjusting the black
Black Gamma
Adjusting the black gamma
level
Low Key SAT
Adjusting the low key
saturation
Copy
Recording
Copying a picture profile
PP Data
Writing/loading a picture
profile
Store
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to store a picture profile on an
SxS memory card.
Recall
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to load a picture profile from an
SxS memory card.
Reset
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to reset.
Resetting a picture profile
1) The Area Indication “On”/“Off” setting is common to
all picture profiles PP1 to PP6.
2) To execute “Color Detection” of “Multi Matrix” or
“Area Detection” of “Color Correction”/”Skin Tone
Detail”
1. Select “Color Detection” or “Area
Detection.”
A square marker that indicates the detection
area appears in the center of the screen, and
“Execute” and “Cancel” are displayed below.
2. Select “Execute.”
Color-phase detection in the marker area is
performed.
When detection successfully ends, a
completion message is displayed then the
screen is restored.
With Multi Matrix, the target color of multimatrix correction is changed to the color
detected by “Color Detection,” and the Area
Indication (zebra pattern) appears on the
screen.
With Skin Tone Detail, the target area for the
adjustment is changed to the area centering
around the color detected by “Area
Detection,” and the Area Indication (zebra
pattern) appears on the screen.
If detection fails, an error message appears,
then the precious screen is restored.
52
Useful Functions
3) Available gamma curves from “Select” in “Gamma”
(STD: Standard gamma, HG: Hyper gamma)
STD1: A gamma table equivalent to an SD camcorder.
STD2: A gamma table with ×4.5 gain.
STD3: A gamma table with ×3.5 gain.
STD4: A gamma table equivalent to the SMPTE-240M
standard.
STD5: A gamma table equivalent to the ITU-R709
standard.
STD6: A gamma table with ×5.0 gain.
HG1: A gamma table for turning 325% D-range input
into 100% output.
HG2: A gamma table for turning 460% D-range input
into 100% output.
HG3: A gamma table for turning 325% D-range input
into 109% output.
HG4: A gamma table for turning 460% D-range input
into 109% output.
Deleting Clips
While standing by to record, the Last Clip DEL
function for deleting the last recorded clip and the
All Clips DEL function for deleting all clips from
an SxS memory card are available.
For clip deletion on the thumbnail screen, see
“Deleting Clips” on page 86.
To delete using the assignable button
To delete using the Setup menu
Select “Last Clip DEL” in “Clip” (page 122) of
the OTHERS menu, select “Execute,” then select
“Execute” again to delete the last recorded clip
from the SxS memory card.
Note
When Clip Continuous Recording is set to “On,” “Last
Clip DEL” cannot be selected.
Deleting clips collectively
Select “All Clips DEL” in “Clip” (page 122) of
the OTHERS menu, select “Execute,” then select
“Execute” again to delete all the clips from the
SxS memory card.
Storing the Setup file
To use an SxS memory card
Only one setup file—designated with the file
name “SETUP.SUF”—can be stored on one SxS
memory card.
1
Insert a memory card on which you
wish to store the setup file to a card slot.
Check that the corresponding memory card
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory
card in the other slot is selected, press the
SLOT SELECT button to switch.
2
Recording
Assign the Last Clip DEL function to one of the
assignable buttons (page 40) in advance.
Press the assignable button to which you have
assigned “Last Clip DEL,” and select “Execute”
to delete the last recorded clip from the SxS
memory card.
Note
Values for “Clock Set” and “Hours Meter” of the
OTHERS menu are not stored.
Select “Store” in “Camera Data” (page
118) of the OTHERS menu, then select
“Execute.”
An in-progress message is displayed during
writing. When writing is completed, a completion
message is displayed.
Notes
• If a setup file already exists on the memory card you
specified in Step 1, a message to confirm whether to
overwrite the file is displayed.
• If there is not sufficient space on the memory card, an
error message is displayed.
To use a USB flash drive (in UDF and exFAT)
Connect the formatted USB flash drive to the
external device connector (page 26).
Select “All Save(USB)” > “Execute” in step 2.
Notes
• If the SxS memory card contains clips of both of HD
Mode and SD Mode, only the clips of the currently
selected mode are deleted.
• Clips with the OK mark (page 39) cannot be deleted if
FAT is selected for the file system. If UDF or exFAT
is selected, clips set to “Lock Clip” (page 83) cannot be
deleted.
Retrieving the Setup file
To use an SxS memory card
When you retrieve the stored setup file, the
camcorder settings are changed according to the
file.
1
Storing/Retrieving the Setting
Data
You can store all the menu settings (including
picture profiles) as a setup file on an SxS memory
card or a USB flash drive.
By retrieving the stored setup file, the proper
setup condition can be immediately obtained.
Insert the memory card on which you
stored the setup file into a card slot.
Check that the corresponding memory card
icon is displayed on the screen. If a memory
card in the other slot is selected, press the
SLOT SELECT button to switch.
2
Select “Recall” in “Camera Data” (page
118) in the OTHERS menu, then select
“Execute.”
Useful Functions
53
An in-progress message is displayed during data
reading. When the read-out is completed, a
completion message is displayed, indicating that
the camcorder settings have been changed
according to the setup file.
To use a USB flash drive (in UDF and exFAT)
Connect the formatted USB flash drive to the
external device connector (page 26).
Select “All Load(USB)” > “Execute” in step 2.
Resetting to the standard values
Recording
The current camcorder settings you made through
various menu and button operations can be
collectively returned to the standard statuses
(factory settings) by executing “All Reset” of the
OTHERS menu.
Planning Metadata
Planning metadata is information about shooting
and recording plans, recorded in an XML file.
Example of a planning metadata file
• Finnish
Notes
• If you define clip and shot mark names in languages
other than those listed above, they may not be
displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
• If you define clip and shot mark names in French,
Dutch, or Finnish, some characters are displayed in a
different but similar font.
Loading a Planning Metadata file
To record planning metadata together with clips,
it is necessary to load a planning metadata file
into the camcorder’s memory in advance.
To use an SxS memory card
Insert the SxS memory card with the planning
metadata file (.xml) saved to the directory below
into the camcorder’s card slot, then select and
load the file via “Load / Slot(A)” or “Load /
Slot(B)” in “Plan.Metadata” (page 124) of the
OTHERS menu.
UDF: General/Sony/Planning
exFAT: XDROOT/General/Sony/Planning
FAT: BPAV/General/Sony/Planning
To use a USB flash drive (in UDF and exFAT)
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in the
NETWORK SET menu to “USB A” in advance.
Note
“USB A” cannot be selected when “Format” in “System”
(page 121) of the OTHERS menu is set to the following
settings.
• XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P, 50P
• XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P, 50P
1
You can shoot using clip names and shot mark
names defined in advance in a planning metadata
file.
This camcorder can display clip names and shot
mark names defined in the following languages:
• English
• Chinese
• German
• French
• Italian
• Spanish
• Dutch
• Portuguese
• Swedish
• Norwegian
• Danish
54
Useful Functions
Connect a USB flash drive formatted
with the FAT32 file system to the
external device connector (page 26).
A file list appears.
Note
The file list displays up to 64 files.
Even if the total number of planning metadata files
is 64 or less, all of the planning metadata files may
not appear if the directory where they are located on
the USB flash drive (General/Sony/Planning)
contains 512 or more files.
2
Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
the jog dial, select the file which you
want to load in the file list, then press
the SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
Confirming the detailed information in planning
metadata
After loading a planning metadata file into
memory of the camcorder, you can check the
details of the file, such as the filename, time and
date of file creation, and the titles specified in the
file.
Select “Properties” in “Plan.Metadata” (page
124) of the OTHERS menu, then select
“Execute.”
1
Launch the browser and input http://
<camcorder’s IP address> (page 116) in
the address bar.
Example: When the IP address is
192.168.1.10, input http://192.168.1.10/ in
the address bar.
2
Input the user name and password, then
click OK.
User name: admin
Password: (your unit’s model in lowercase;
pxw-x200, as appropriate)
Clearing the loaded planning metadata
To clear the planning data loaded in the
camcorder’s memory, proceed as follows:
Select “Clear” in “Plan.Metadata” (page 124) of
the OTHERS menu, then select “Execute.”
Defining a clip name in Planning
Metadata
The following two types of clip name strings can
be written in a planning metadata file.
• ASCII-format name, which is displayed on the
EVF screen
• UTF-8-format name, which is actually
registered as the clip name
You can select the type for displaying the clip
name with “Clip Name Disp” in “Plan.Metadata”
(page 124) of the OTHERS menu.
When you specify a clip name in planning
metadata, the name is displayed under the
operation status indication on the EVF screen.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>3
<PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
P0001"spcreationDate="
2011-08-20T17:00:00+09:00"sp
lastUpdate="
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp
version="1.00">3
<PropertiessppropertyId="
assignment"spupdate="
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">3
<TitlespusAscii=" Typhoon"sp
xml:lang="en"> Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo
</Title>3
</Properties>3
</PlanningMetadata>3
Recording
Using the Wi-Fi connection
When connecting the unit with a computer via
Wi-Fi, the file transmission can be done accessing
the unit’s Web menu from a computer.
Example of clip name strings
Use a text editor to modify the description for the
<Title> tag.
The shaded fields in the example are clip name
strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format
(up to 44 characters).
“Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo” is described in UTF-8
format (up to 44 bytes).
Here, “sp” indicates a space, and 3 indicates a
carriage return.
Notes
• When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line by breaking a line with a CRLF only after the last
character of the line, and do not enter spaces except
where specified with “sp.”
• A string of up to 44 bytes (or 44 characters) is valid as
a clip name. If a UTF-8-format string exceeds 44 bytes,
the string up to the 44th byte is used as the clip name.
If only a string in ASCII format is specified, the
ASCII-format name up to the 44th characters is used as
the clip name. When neither the ASCII-format name
string nor UTF-8-format name string is valid, a clip
name in the standard format is used.
Using a clip name defined in planning metadata
Load a planning metadata file that contains the
clip name into memory of the camcorder, then
select “Plan” for “Auto Naming” in “Clip” (page
122) of the OTHERS menu.
Clip names are generated by adding an
underscore (_) and a 5-digit serial number (00001
to 99999).
Example: Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001,
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002, ...
Useful Functions
55
Notes
• If the serial number reaches 99999, it returns to 00001
upon the next recording.
• When you load another planning metadata file, the 5digit serial number returns to 00001.
Defining Shot Mark names in Planning
Metadata
When you record shot mark 1 or shot mark 2, you
can apply a name to the shot mark, using a string
defined in planning metadata.
Recording
Example of shot mark name strings
Use a text editor to modify the description for the
<Meta name> tag.
The shaded fields in the example are shot mark
name strings.
Names can be either in ASCII format (up to 32
characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16 characters).
Here, “sp” indicates a space and 3 indicates a
carriage return.
Note
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character,
the maximum length of that string is limited to 16
characters.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>3
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
H00123"spcreationDate="
2011-04-15T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"spversion=
"1.00">3
<PropertiessppropertyId=
"assignment"spclass="original"sp
update="2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">3
<TitlespusAscii="Football
Game"spxml:lang="en">
Football Game 15/04/2011
</Title>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
content=" Goal "/>3
<Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
content=" Shoot "/>3
</Properties>3
</PlanningMetadata>3
Note
When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
line by breaking a line with a CRLF only after the last
56
Useful Functions
character of the line, and do not enter spaces except
where specified with “sp,” except within shot mark name
strings.
Copying Planning Metadata files
collectively
You can copy planning metadata files stored in
the General folder on an SxS memory card
collectively to another SxS memory card.
Select “General Files” in “Copy All” (page 123)
of the OTHERS menu.
Obtaining Location Information
(GPS)
Location and time information of video shot
when GPS positioning is enabled is recorded by
the camcorder.
The GPS function is set to “Off” by factory
default.
Compatible format for GPS recording
When the camcorder is in exFAT/HD/XAVC
Mode, you can select any of the following video
formats (page 139).
NTSC Area
XAVC-I 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L25 1080/59.94i
XAVC-I 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P
XAVC-I 720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 720/59.94P
PAL Area
XAVC-I 1080/50i
XAVC-L50 1080/50P
XAVC-L35 1080/50P
XAVC-L50 1080/50i
XAVC-L35 1080/50i
XAVC-L25 1080/50i
XAVC-I 1080/25P
XAVC-L50 1080/25P
XAVC-L35 1080/25P
XAVC-I 720/50P
XAVC-L50 720/50P
Positioning Display
status
GPS reception
status
• While [SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select] is set to
[3G SDI&HD HDMI] and [HD SDI&HD
HDMI], positioning information is output from
the SDI output during positioning, even if a
format other than supported format is set.
Positioning
Weak GPS signal is
being received.
Check that the camcorder is in standby.
2
To display the GPS reception status on
the LCD monitor/EVF screen, check
that “GPS” in “Display On/Off” of the
LCD/VF SET menu is set to “On.”
3
Set the OTHERS menu>GPS to “On.”
•
appears on the LCD monitor/EVF
screen and positioning is prepared. When
positioning is complete, positioning
information is recorded when recording a
video with a compatible format.
Note
Positioning information is not recorded in proxy
data.
GPS reception state
The icon displayed in the viewfinder varies,
depending on the signal reception from the GPS
satellites.
Positioning Display
status
GPS reception
status
Off
GPS is set to off or an
error occurs.
Positioning information
cannot be acquired
because the GPS signal
cannot be received.
Move to a place with a
clear view of the sky.
The camcorder is
detecting the satellite. It
may takes several
minutes to acquire
positioning.
Difficult to
acquire
positioning
Detecting the
satellite
Not
displayed
• It may take some time to start acquiring location
information after turning on the camcorder.
• If a positioning icon is not displayed after
several minutes, there may be a problem with
signal reception. Start shooting without location
information, or move to an area with a clear
view of the sky. Shooting when a positioning
icon is not displayed means that location
information will not be recorded.
• The GPS signal may not be received when
indoors or near tall structures. Move to a
location with a clear view of the sky.
• The recording of location information may be
interrupted, depending on the strength of the
received signal, even if a positioning icon is
displayed.
Useful Functions
Recording
1
GPS signal is being
received. Positioning
information can be
acquired.
Strong GPS signal is
being received.
Positioning information
can be acquired.
57
2
Proxy Recording
You can record proxy data on an SD card
simultaneously while recording on an SxS
memory card.
Usable SD Cards
SDHC memory card* (Speed Class: Higher than
4, Capacity: Up to 32 GB)
Performing Proxy Recording
Recording
1
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in
the NETWORK SET menu to
“Network&Proxy.”
2
Insert the SD card into the slot with the
label facing right.
3
Start recording.
Formatting an SD Card
1
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in
the NETWORK SET menu to
“Network&Proxy.”
2
Insert the SD card into the slot with the
label facing right.
3
In “Proxy File” (page 115) of the
NETWORK SET menu, specify
“Format SD Card” then select
“Execute.”
The in-progress message and progress status
are displayed. When formatting is complete,
a completion message is displayed. Press the
SEL/SET dial to hide the message.
Notes
• All the data is erased when an SD card is formatted,
and the data cannot be restored.
• Use an SD card that is formatted in FAT32.
Checking the Remaining Time
The remaining time of an SD card can be checked
on the LCD monitor/EVF screen (page 111).
1
58
To use media formatted with this camcorder in
the slots of other devices
Make a backup of the media, then format it using
the other device.
* Indicated as “SD card” in this Operating Instructions.
When you use an SD card with this camcorder, it
must be formatted using the format function of
this camcorder.
It is also necessary to format an SD card if a
caution message is displayed when you mount it.
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in
the NETWORK SET menu to
“Network&Proxy.”
Proxy Recording
Insert the SD card into the slot with the
label facing right.
When the recording on an SxS memory card
is stopped, proxy recording is also stopped.
Memo
“Rec2-P” appears on the LCD monitor/EVF screen
during proxy recording.
Notes
• The proxy recording does not work when “Format” in
“System” of the OTHERS menu is set to the following
settings.
—exFAT:
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P, 50P
—UDF, exFAT:
HD422 50/720/29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
DVCAM 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P
IMX50 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P
—FAT:
SP 1440×1080/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
DVCAM 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P
• The proxy recording does not work during
Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots, Interval
Recording, Frame Recording, Picture Cache
Recording, Clip Continuous Recording, and Slow &
Quick Motion.
• When performing proxy recording, set Simultaneous
Recording in the 2 slots, Interval Recording, Frame
Recording, Picture Cache Recording, Clip Continuous
Recording, and Slow & Quick Motion to off, and set
“Proxy” of the CAMERA SET menu to “On” (page
101).
• Data integrity is not guaranteed if the power is turned
off or an SD card is removed while it is being accessed.
Data on the SD card may be destroyed. The camcorder
does not have the salvage function that can recover the
damaged material. Be sure that the camcorder is turned
off when you remove the SD card from the camcorder.
Be sure that the ACCESS lamp of the used SD card is
turned off when you turn the camcorder off.
• Make sure that the SD card does not pop out when
inserting or removing it.
• GPS positioning information is not recorded in proxy
data.
Changing the Proxy Recording
Setting
Setting the picture size
Select the picture size with “Size” in “Proxy File”
(page 115) of the NETWORK SET menu.
The file system of the recorded file is FAT32, and
the file extension is “.mp4.”
The timecode is also recorded simultaneously.
Storage Destination of the
Recorded File
The recorded file is stored under the “/PRIVATE/
PXROOT/Clip” directory.
About the File Name
The file name is same as the clip name that is
recorded on an SxS memory card.
When “Match Clip Name” is set to “Off,” the file
name generated as the timecode at the start of
recording. (Example: When the recording starts at
14:30:20 05 frame, the file name will be
“14_30_20_05.mp4.”) If there is the file that was
recorded at same time, the camcorder does not
overwrite it and the serial number is added to the
new file name.
Note
When switching memory cards with the SLOT
SELECT button during proxy recording, the clip
name on an SxS memory card is same as the
proxy file name, even if “Match Clip Name” is set
to “On.”
You can make a wireless LAN connection
between the camcorder and a device such as a
smartphone or tablet by attaching the supplied
IFU-WLM3 USB wireless LAN module.
Notes
• You cannot use a USB wireless LAN module other
than the IFU-WLM3.
• You cannot make a wireless LAN connection when
“Format” in “System” is set to the following settings.
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P, 50P
Recording
About the Recorded File
Connecting to Other
Device via Wireless LAN
Making a wireless LAN connection between a
device and the camcorder enables you to do the
following.
• Remote operation via a wireless LAN
You can control the camcorder from a
smartphone, tablet, or computer that is
connected to the camcorder via the wireless
LAN.
• File transferring via a wireless LAN
You can transfer a proxy file (low resolution)
that is recorded on an SD card in the camcorder
or original file (high resolution) that is recorded
by the camcorder to the server via the wireless
LAN.
• Video/audio streaming via a wireless LAN
You can create a stream (H.264/AAC-LC
compression) from the video/audio of a
camcorder, and watch the video/audio
streaming by using the “Content Browser
Mobile” application that is installed on a
smartphone, tablet, or computer via the wireless
LAN.
“Content Browser Mobile” application
You can operate the camcorder remotely while
streaming the audio/video of the camcorder, and
perform the settings of the camcorder by using the
“Content Browser Mobile” application.
For details about the “Content Browser Mobile”
application, contact your Sony dealer or a Sony
service representative.
Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN
59
Compatible devices
You can use a smartphone, tablet, or computer for
setting and operating the camcorder. Compatible
devices, operating systems, and browsers are as
follows.
Device
OS
Browser
Smartphone
Android4.1/4.2/
4.3/4.4
iOS7.1/8.0/8.1
Android4.1/4.2/
4.3/4.4
iOS7.1/8.0/8.1
Windows 7/
Windows 8
Mac OS 10.8/
10.9/10.10
Chrome
Tablet
Recording
Computer
You can connect the camcorder to an NFCcompatible device with one-touch operation by
using the NFC function.
1
Start “Settings” on the device, select
“Other Settings,” then mark the “NFC”
checkbox.
2
Turn the camcorder on.
3
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in
the NETWORK SET menu to
“Network&Proxy.”
Safari
Chrome
Safari
Chrome/Safari
Safari
Attaching the IFU-WLM3
1
Connecting to an NFC-compatible device
with one-touch operation
Open the cover of the external device
connector, then attach the IFU-WLM3.
Note
Note
It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
wireless LAN function is activated.
The radio wave intensity indication on the LCD/
EVF screen flashes. Wait until the radio wave
intensity indication stops flashing.
Attach/remove the IFU-WLM3 while the camcorder is
turned off.
Connecting with the Wireless LAN
Access Point Mode
The camcorder works as an access point, and
connects to a device via a wireless LAN.
Smartphone/
tablet
60
Computer
Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN
4
Activate the NFC function.
Select “Execute” for “NFC” in the
NETWORK SET menu (page 115).
5
Hold the smartphone near the
camcorder.
The smartphone is connected to the
camcorder and “Content Browser Mobile”
starts.
The “AP” indication appears on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen when smartphone is
connected to the camcorder.
For the user name and password of the access
authentication, check “User Name” and
“Password” in the NETWORK SET menu
(page 116).
Notes
• Cancel the sleep or screen lock function of the
smartphone in advance.
• Hold the device near to the camcorder without moving
the device until “Content Browser Mobile” starts (1 to
2 seconds).
8
Connecting to a WPS-compatible device
Input the user name and password, then
select “OK.”
Connecting by inputting an SSID and
password on a device
1
Turn the camcorder on.
You can connect the camcorder to a device by
inputting an SSID and password on a device.
2
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in
the NETWORK SET menu to
“Network&Proxy.”
1
Turn the camcorder on.
2
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in
the NETWORK SET menu to
“Network&Proxy.”
Note
It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
wireless LAN function is activated.
The radio wave intensity indication on the LCD/
EVF screen flashes. Wait until the radio wave
intensity indication stops flashing.
3
Select “Access Point” for “Network
Mode” in the NETWORK SET menu
(page 114).
The “AP” indication appears on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen.
4
Select “Execute” for “WPS” in the
NETWORK SET menu (page 115).
5
Select “Network Setting” > “Wi-Fi
Setting” on the device, then set “Wi-Fi”
to on.
6
Select the camcorder’s SSID from the
SSID list in “Wi-Fi Network” on the
device, then select “WPS Push Button”
in “Option” on the device.
Note
It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
wireless LAN function is activated.
The radio wave intensity indication on the LCD/
EVF screen flashes. Wait until the radio wave
intensity indication stops flashing.
3
4
Select “Network Setting” > “Wi-Fi
Setting” on the device, then set “Wi-Fi”
to on.
5
Connect the device to the camcorder by
selecting the camcorder’s SSID from
the SSID list in “Wi-Fi Network” and
inputting the password on the device.
For the SSID and password of the camcorder,
check “SSID&Key” in the NETWORK SET
menu (page 115).
• The operation method differs depending on the
device.
• For the SSID and password of the camcorder,
check “SSID&Key” in the NETWORK SET
menu (page 115).
Start the browser on the device, then
access “http://192.168.1.1:8080/
index.html.”
The screen for inputting “User Name” and
“Password” appears.
Select “Access Point” for “Network
Mode” in the NETWORK SET menu
(page 114).
The “AP” indication appears on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen.
Notes
7
Recording
You can connect the camcorder to a WPScompatible device by using the WPS function.
Note
The operation method differs depending on the
device.
6
Start the browser on the device, then
access “http://192.168.1.1:8080/
index.html.”
The screen for inputting “User Name” and
“Password” appears.
Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN
61
For the user name and password of the access
authentication, check “User Name” and
“Password” in the NETWORK SET menu
(page 114).
7
3
Note
Input the user name and password, then
select “OK.”
Connecting with the Wireless LAN
Station Mode
It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
wireless LAN function is activated.
The radio wave intensity indication on the LCD/
EVF screen flashes. Wait until the radio wave
intensity indication stops flashing.
4
Recording
The camcorder connects to an existing access
point of the wireless LAN as a client. The
camcorder and device connect via the access
point.
Smartphone/
tablet
Computer
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in
the NETWORK SET menu to
“Network&Proxy.”
Set “Network Mode” in the
NETWORK SET menu (page 114) to
“Station.”
Note
It may take time (for about 1 minute) until the
camcorder is in the station mode.
5
Execute “WPS” in the NETWORK
SET menu.
6
Press the WPS button of the access
point.
For the operation of the WPS button, refer to
the operating instructions of the access point.
When the connection is completed, the radio
wave intensity indication on the LCD/EVF
screen lights at a strength of more than 1.
Access
point
Note
If the connection fails, perform steps from step 1
again.
7
Connect the device to the access point.
For connecting, refer to the operating
instructions of the device.
8
Connecting to the access point with the
WPS function
For the camcorder’s IP address, check “IP
Address” in the NETWORK SET menu
(page 116).
The screen for inputting “User Name” and
“Password” appears.
For the user name and password of the access
authentication, check “User Name” and
“Password” in the NETWORK SET menu
(page 114).
If the access point is compatible with the WPS
function, you can connect to the access point with
simple settings. If the access point is not
compatible with the WPS function, see “To
connect to the access point in the station mode
without the WPS function” (page 76).
62
1
Turn the access point on.
2
Turn the camcorder on.
Connecting to Other Device via Wireless LAN
Start the browser on the device, then
access to “http://<IP address that the
access point assigns to the
camcorder>:8080/index.html.”
9
Input the user name and password, then
select “OK.”
The Web menu of the camcorder appears on
the browser. For details, see “About the Web
Menu” (page 73).
Connecting to the
Internet
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet by
attaching an optional modem, a wireless USB
module IFU-WLM3 (supplied), or a USB-RJ45
adaptor supplied with an optional network
adaptor kit CBK-NA1 to the camcorder.
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet via
a 3G/4G network by attaching an optional modem
to the unit.
For compatible modems, contact your Sony
dealer or a Sony service representative.
Recording
Connecting with a modem
Attaching the modem to the camcorder
1
Open the cover of the external device
connector.
2
Attach the extension adaptor for
network module supplied with the
optional network adaptor kit CBK-NA1
to the camcorder.
Connect the convex terminal to the terminal
for the USB wireless LAN module on the
camcorder and connect the concave terminal
to the modem. You can attach the adaptor to
the screw hole (1/4 in.) of the accessory shoe
mount.
Internet
Extension adaptor
for network module
+ Modem
3
Attach the modem to the extension
adaptor for network module.
Connecting to the Internet
63
Note
Attach/remove the modem while the camcorder is
turned off.
Smartphone/
tablet
Computer
Connecting
1
Turn the camcorder on.
2
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in
the NETWORK SET menu to
“Network&Proxy.”
Access
point
Recording
• When an optional modem compatible to the
camcorder is attached, “Network Mode” in
the NETWORK SET menu is
automatically set to “Modem,” then the
camcorder is ready to be connected to the
Internet.
Internet
Note
It may take a time (for 30 to 60 seconds) until the
camcorder is in the modem mode. Wait until the
“3G/4G” indication for the network connection
status on the LCD Monitor/EVF screen (page 16) is
turned on.
Connecting with the wireless LAN
Wi-Fi station mode
Smartphone/
tablet
Internet
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet in
the Wi-Fi station mode by attaching the USB
wireless LAN module IFU-WLM3 (supplied),
via an optional 3G/4G/LTE access point or by
tethering to a device.
Connecting
If the access point or device is compatible with
the WPS function, connect the camcorder to the
Internet by performing procedures of
“Connecting to the access point with the WPS
function” (page 62). If the access point or device
is not compatible with the WPS function, connect
the camcorder to the Internet by performing
procedures of “To connect to the access point in
the station mode without the WPS function”
(page 76).
Before connecting, turn the access point or device
on, and activate its tethering function.
64
Connecting to the Internet
Connecting to the Internet with a
LAN cable
Connecting
1
Turn the camcorder on.
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet by
attaching the USB-RJ45 adaptor supplied with
the optional network adaptor kit CBK-NA1, via
LAN cables connected to an internet router.
2
Set “NW&Proxy/USB” (page 114) in
the NETWORK SET menu to
“Network&Proxy.”
• If USB-RJ45 adaptor is attached properly,
“Network Mode” is automatically set to
“Wired LAN.”
Computer
3
Internet
USB-RJ45 adaptor
Attaching the USB-RJ45 adaptor to the
camcorder
Open the cover of the external device
connector.
2
Attach the USB-RJ45 adaptor to the
camcorder.
Use the belt supplied with the network
adaptor kit CBK-NA1 to attach the network
cable connected to a USB-RJ45 adaptor to
the camcorder.
Note
Attach/remove the USB-RJ45 adapter while the
camcorder is turned off.
4
Recording
• “DHCP”
Set the DHCP setting.
When you set to “On,” the IP address is
assigned to the camcorder automatically.
To assign the IP address to the camcorder
manually, set to “Off.”
• “IP Address”
Input the IP address of the camcorder.
This setting is available only when
“DHCP” is set to “Off.”
• “Subnet mask”
Input the subnet mask of the camcorder.
This setting is available only when
“DHCP” is set to “Off.”
• “Gateway”
Input the default gateway for the access
point.
This setting is available only when
“DHCP” is set to “Off.”
• “DNS Auto”
Set to acquire DNS automatically.
When set to “On”, the DNS server address
is automatically acquired.
• “1st DNS Server”
Input the primary DNS server for the
access point.
This setting is available when “DNS Auto”
is set to “Off.”
• “2nd DNS Server”
Input the secondary DNS server for the
access point.
This setting is available only when “DNS
Auto” is set to “Off.”
Router
1
Perform connection settings in the
Wired LAN Set menu.
When you complete the inputs, select
“Execute” in “Set” to confirm settings.
Connecting to the Internet
65
Note
Note
If you changed the settings, make sure to select
“Execute” in “Set.”
If you do not select “Execute”, changed settings are
not applied.
It may take a time (for 30 to 60 seconds) until the
camcorder is in the wired LAN mode. Wait until the
“LAN icon” indication for the network connection
status on the LCD Monitor/EVF screen (page 16) is
turned on.
List of functions for network connections
A list of functions for each Network Mode in NETWORK SET menu is as follows.
Recording
Functions
Network Mode
Access Point
Station
Modem
Wired LAN
Off
Proxy Recording (page 58)
Proxy playback (page 73)
a
a
a1)
×
×
a
a1)
a
a
a
a
×
a
×
a
×
a1)
a1)
a
a
×
×
a
a
×
×
×
×
×
×
Transferring a file (page 67)
Transmitting streaming (page 68)
Monitoring (page 74)
Remote Commander (page 71)
1) The function of a device connected with the camcorder via a network
66
Connecting to the Internet
3
Uploading a File
You can upload a proxy file or original file that is
recorded on the camcorder to the server on the
Internet via a 3G/4G/LTE network or an access
point.
Select the file.
Select the file by touching the file. To cancel,
touch the file again.
You can check the file by double touching
the file to play back (SD card only).
4
Touch “Transfer.”
Preparations
To connect to the Internet
Connect the camcorder to the Internet by
following the procedure in “Connecting to the
Internet” (page 63).
To register the server for uploading
Register the server for uploading in advance.
For details about registering the server, see
“Register the server for uploading” (page 77).
Recording
The server that you set to the default server at
“Default Server” in “Register the server for
uploading” (page 77) appears.
To change the server, touch the server to
display the server list, then select a server.
Input the directory for the server to
“Directory” if necessary.
Selecting the File and Uploading
Upload the file that is recorded on an SD card, or
the original file that is recorded on an SxS
memory card, to the server.
Uploading a proxy file on an SD card
1
2
Connect a device to the camcorder via a
wireless LAN, start the browser on the
device, then access the camcorder from
the browser (page 59).
Display the file list screen to select the
file.
Touch “
” > “Media Info” > “SD Card.”
The “SD Card,” “Slot A,” or “Slot B” screen
appears.
Example: “SD Card” screen
5
Touch “Transfer.”
The camcorder starts uploading the selected
file.
To cancel uploading, touch “Cancel.”
Uploading an original file on an SxS
memory card
1
Connect a device to the camcorder via a
wireless LAN, start the browser on the
terminal device, then access the
camcorder from the browser (page 59).
2
Display the file list screen to select the
file.
Touch “
” > “Media Info” > “Slot A” (for
a memory card in the slot A) or “Slot B” (for
a memory card in the slot B).
The “SD Card,” “Slot A,” or “Slot B” screen
appears.
Uploading a File
67
Example: “SD Card” screen
Transmitting streaming
video and audio
You can transmit the video and audio captured/
played back with the camcorder via Internet or
local network.
3
Recording
4
Select the file.
Preparations
Select the file by touching the file. To cancel,
touch the file again.
You can check the file by double touching
the file to play back (SD card only).
To connect to the Internet
Touch “Transfer.”
The server that you set to the default server at
“Default Server” in “Register the server for
uploading” (page 77) appears.
To change the server, touch a server to
display the server list, then select the server.
Input the directory for the server to
“Directory” if necessary.
Connect the camcorder to the Internet by
following the procedure of “Connecting to the
Internet” (page 63).
To connect to the local network
Connect the camcorder to the local network by
following the procedure of “Connecting to Other
Device via Wireless LAN” (page 59).
To set the transmission destination of the
streaming
Up to 3 settings for the streaming can be
maintained as presets.
5
1
Specify “Preset Edit” in “Streaming
Edit” of the NETWORK SET menu
(page 115) and select “Preset1” (or
“Preset2,” “Preset3”) for the
transmission destination.
2
Set “Type,” “Size,” “Bit Rate,”
“Dest.Address,” and “Dest.Port” for
the stream.
3
When you complete the settings in step
2, Select “Execute” in “Set” to confirm
settings.
Touch “Transfer.”
The camcorder starts uploading the selected
file.
To cancel uploading, touch “Cancel.”
Checking the file uploading
You can check the upload status on the “Job List”
screen that is displayed by touching “Job List” on
the “SD Card,” “Slot A,” or “Slot B” screen (page
78).
Note
When you change the settings of “Type,” “Size,”
“Bit Rate,” “Dest.Address,” and “Dest.Port”, select
“Execute” in “Set.” If you do not select “Execute”,
changed settings are not applied.
The streaming methods for the camcorder are
MPEG2-TS/UDP and MPEG2-TS/RTP.
Set in “Type.”
68
Transmitting streaming video and audio
To view streaming video and audio, use a receiver
that supports these methods.
For details about the receiver, see the operating
instructions of the receiver.
Notes
Recording
When “Bit Rate” (page 115) of the proxy format setting
is set to “9Mbps (VBR)”:
• “Bit Rate” of the stream setting cannot be set to a
setting higher than “6Mbps.”
• When you select a preset of which “Bit Rate” is set to
a setting higher than “6Mbps,” “Bit Rate” of the
streaming setting is changed to “3Mbps”
automatically.
When you start streaming with “Bit Rate” set to
“9Mbps” or “6Mbps,” set “Bit Rate” for the Proxy
recording format (page 115) to options other than
“9Mpbs” in advance.
Transmitting streaming video and audio
69
Starting streaming
1
Set “Setting” to “On” in “Streaming” of the NETWORK SET menu (page 114).
The streaming status is displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen, and streaming starts.
You can assign the “Streaming” to an assignable button. For details about assigning, refer to
“Assignable Buttons” (page 40) in the Operating Guide.
The streaming status is displayed in the streaming status indication area (page 14) on the LCD monitor/
EVF screen.
Conditions
Recording
NETWORK SET
menu>Network Mode
NETWORK SET
menu>Streaming>Setting
Streaming status
Icon
Off
Except for “Off”
–
Off
On
–
–
No streaming
No display
No display
Streaming video
Error
Notes
• You cannot start streaming when “NW&Proxy/USB” in the NETWORK SET menu is set to “USB A” or “Off.”
• The setting automatically turns to “Off” when the camcorder is turned off. To transmit streaming again, set
“Setting” to “On” in “Streaming.”
• It may take several tens of seconds to stream actual video or audio after starting streaming.
• If you set the transmission destination of the streaming incorrectly or the camcorder does not connect to the
network, “×” appears on the screen as the streaming status indication.
• Video/audio data is transmitted via the Internet as is. Therefore, there is a possibility of data leakage. Make sure
that the destination is able to receive the streaming data. Data may be transmitted to an unexpected receiver due
to the incorrect setting of an address, etc.
• Depending on the network conditions, not all frames may be played back.
• The picture quality deteriorates at scenes where there is quick motion.
• When streaming is set to a large size and small bit rate, not all frames may be played back.
To improve this situation, select a smaller size in “Size.”
• When you start streaming, proxy recording and file transferring are not available.
When you start streaming during proxy recording or a file transfer, proxy recording or file transferring
automatically stops.
• When you start streaming during proxy recording or file transfer by pressing the assignable button to which
“Streaming” is assigned, proxy recording or file transferring automatically stops. If streaming stops after the proxy
recording is stopped, proxy recording starts. In this case, the clip of the proxy recording is different from that of
the stopped one. In the case of a file transfer, file transferring resumes.
Stop streaming
1
70
Set “Setting” to “Off” in “Streaming”
of the NETWORK SET menu (page
114).
Transmitting streaming video and audio
Streaming also stops by pressing the
assignable button to which “Streaming” is
assigned.
When the camcorder is connected to a device via
Wireless LAN (page 59) or is connecting to the
Internet with the wireless LAN station mode
(page 64), you can also set the transmission
destination and starting/stopping streaming from
the Web menu (page 73).
Using the Wi-Fi Remote
Commander
Notes
Recording
When a Wi-Fi connection is established between
a device such as smartphone, tablet, PC, etc., and
the camcorder, the Wi-Fi remote commander
appears on the device screen and the device can
be used as a remote commander.
You can start/stop recording, adjust iris/focus/
zoom, etc., with a Wi-Fi connected device. This
function is useful for setting the camcorder in a
remote place, such as the top of a crane, etc.
• When iris is not set to auto, “IRIS” slider operation and
ON/OFF setting of “Auto IRIS” are not available.
• When the focus ring is pulled rearward, “FOCUS”
slider operation and ON/OFF setting of “Auto Focus”
are not available.
• When the ZOOM switch is set to MANUAL, “ZOOM”
slider operation is not available.
The displays of Wi-Fi remote commander
For smartphone
Using the Wi-Fi Remote Commander
71
For Tablet
To display the Wi-Fi remote commander
Recording
To display the Wi-Fi remote commander on a
device screen, settings are required on both the
device and camcorder.
Camcorder settings
1
Set “Wi-Fi Remote” in the NETWORK
SET menu (page 114) to “On.”
Device settings
Set the smartphone, tablet, PC, etc., to be used as
the Wi-Fi remote commander.
1
Make a Wi-Fi connection between the
device and camcorder (page 59).
2
Launch the browser and input http://
<camcorder’s IP address> (refer to “IP
Address” in the NETWORK SET menu
(page 116))/rm.html.
Example: When the IP address is
192.168.1.10, input “http://192.168.1.10/
rm.html” in the address bar.
The Wi-Fi remote commander will appear on
the device screen when the Wi-Fi connection
is established.
Thereafter operate the camcorder as shown
on the screen of the Wi-Fi connected device.
The REC button becomes unavailable when
the Lock switch is dragged to the right.
Notes
• Depending on the device, the Wi-Fi remote
commander may not appear properly on the device’s
screen even though you input “http://<camcorder’s IP
address> (page 116)/rm.html” in the address bar. In
this case, input “rms.html” for a smartphone or
“rmt.html” for a tablet at the end of the address to
display the Wi-Fi remote commander properly.
• The Wi-Fi remote commander on the device’s screen
may no longer match the actual status of the camcorder
72
Using the Wi-Fi Remote Commander
in the following cases. When this happens, refresh the
browser on the device.
—when the camcorder is restarted while the Wi-Fi
connection is established
—when the camcorder is controlled directly while
the Wi-Fi connection is established
—when the device is reconnected
—when you operate forward/backward on the
device’s browser.
• If the Wi-Fi signal is poor, the Wi-Fi remote
commander may not work properly.
About the Web Menu
The Web menu of the camcorder appears by
accessing the camcorder from the browser of a
device that is connected to the camcorder via a
wireless LAN. You can perform the settings for the
wireless function or the operation of the file transfer.
Initial screen
About the setting menu
The setting menu appears by touching
at the
upper left of the screen. Touch the item that you
want to set.
“Device Status”
• “Short Cut”
“Media”: Short-cut button for the “SD Card”
screen (page 67)
• “Status”
• Streaming
Monitoring: Streaming is on the “Off” status
Running: MPEG2-TS/UDP or MPEG2-TS/
RTP
Stop: Streaming is stopped
Initializing: Streaming is preparing
Error Indications: Destination Address Error,
No Internet Access
• Proxy
Recording: Recording a proxy file
Stop: Recording is stopped
“Remain”: SD card remaining space indication
“Warning/Error”: Warning/Error indication
(“Wxx-xxx” is a warning number. “Exx-xxx” is
an error number (page 157))
• “Network”
“Wireless LAN IP Address”: Camcorder’s IP
address
• “Hardware”
“Serial Number”: Camcorder’s serial number
“OSS Information”: Copyright information
Displays the screen for the settings of the
camcorder.
• “Wireless Module”
Streaming Format: Streaming Format settings
(page 74)
Proxy Format: Proxy Format settings (page 75)
“Format”: Format settings (page 75)
• “Wireless LAN”
“Station Settings”: Wireless LAN settings
(page 75)
“Status”: Status for the wireless LAN settings
(page 76)
• “Upload Settings”
Upload settings (page 76)
Recording
When connecting the camcorder and device, and
accessing the camcorder from the browser on the
device, the “SD Card” screen in “Media Info” of
the camcorder appears on the browser.
“Settings”
Note
When the “Settings” screen is displayed, the desired
setting screen appears by touching the following.
“Media Info”
Displays the screen for displaying the status of the
media, or selecting the file that is uploaded (page
67).
• “SD Card”: Media that is inserted into the
PROXY SD slot of the camcorder.
• “Slot A”: Media that is inserted into card slot A
of the camcorder.
• “Slot B”: Media that is inserted into card slot B
of the camcorder.
“Job List”
Displays the screen for managing the uploaded
files (page 78).
“Cam Remote Control”
Displays the Wi-Fi remote commander (page 71).
About the Web Menu
73
Streaming Format settings
You can set the format of the stream that is
monitored with the device. Alternatively, you can
set the format/transmission destination of the
stream that transmits streaming via the Internet or
local network.
Video
• AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long GOP
• Size is selected in the following settings.
“1Mbps (VBR)”: 480 × 270
“0.5Mbps (VBR)”: 480 × 270
Streaming settings
You can set the format or transmission
destination for streaming. Up to three settings can
be preset.
“On/Off”
Recording
Audio
Switches between on/off for the streaming
transmission.
• AAC-LC compression
• Sampling frequency: 48 kHz
• Bit rate: 128 kbps for Stereo
When “On” is selected, the monitoring function is not
available.
Note
“Preset”
Select the preset from “Preset 1” to “Preset 3.”
You can edit “Preset” by touching “Preset Edit.”
Monitoring settings
You can set the format when monitoring on the
terminal device.
“Size” (“Monitoring”)
Set the size and bit rate of the video for the
monitoring.
“640 × 360”: 3 Mbps (VBR)
“480 × 270”: 1 Mbps (VBR)
“480 × 270”: 0.5 Mbps (VBR)
Note
This bit rate is the average value. The actual bit rate may
be more than the average value.
“Frame Rate”
Displays the frame rate of the video.
“23.98fps”: 23.975 fps
“25fps”: 25 fps
“29.97fps”: 29.97 fps
“50fps”: 50 fps
“59.94fps”: 59.94 fps
Note
“24 fps” is not supported.
“Bit Rate”
Displays the bit rate of the video.
“3Mbps (VBR)”: 640 × 360
74
About the Web Menu
“Type”
Select the type of streaming video from “MPEG2 TS/UDP” or “MPEG-2 TS/RTP.”
“Size”
Set the size of streaming video.
“HD/SD Auto”
“1280 × 720”
“640 × 360”
“480 × 270”
When you select “HD/SD Auto,” the size is set to
1920 × 1080 or 1280 × 720 according to the
setting of the recording format recorded in the
SxS memory card or format of the clip to be
played back.
“Bit Rate”
Set the bit rate of the streaming video.
“9Mbps”
“6Mbps”
“3Mbps”
“2Mbps”
“1Mbps”
“0.5Mbps”
Selectable bit rate differs depending on the setting
of “Size.”
Note
When “Bit Rate” (page 115) of the proxy format setting
is set to “9Mbps (VBR)”:
• “Bit Rate” of the stream setting cannot be set to a
setting higher than “6Mbps.”
• When you select a preset of which “Bit Rate” is set to
a setting higher than “6Mbps,” “Bit Rate” of the
streaming setting is changed to “3Mbps”
automatically.
“Destination Address”
“Destination Port”
Input the port number of the transmission
destination server used for streaming.
Displays the frame rate of the video.
“23.98 fps”: 23.975 fps
“25 fps”: 25 fps
“29.97 fps”: 29.97 fps
“50 fps”: 50 fps
“59.94 fps”: 59.94 fps
Note
“24 fps” is not supported.
“Bit Rate”
Displays the bit rate of the video.
“9 Mbps (VBR)”: 1280 × 720
“3 Mbps (VBR)”: 640 × 360
“1 Mbps (VBR)”: 480 × 270
“0.5 Mbps (VBR)”: 480 × 270
Proxy Format settings
Wireless LAN Settings (Station
Settings)
You can set the format of the proxy file that is
recorded on the SD card of the camcorder.
You can perform the settings for connecting to a
wireless LAN.
Recording
Input the address of the transmission destination
server for the streaming data.
“Frame Rate”
Video
XAVC Proxy (AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0
Long GOP)
Size is selected in the following settings.
Audio
AAC-LC compression
Sampling frequency: 48 kHz
Bit rate: 128 kbps for Stereo
“Host Name”
Displays the host name of the camcorder. (Cannot
be changed).
“SSID”
Displays the SSID that is selected at “Access
Point.”
“Key”
Input the password for the access point.
“Size”
Set the size and bit rate of the video for the proxy
file.
“1280 × 720”: 9 Mbps (VBR)
“640 × 360”: 3 Mbps (VBR)
“480 × 270”: 1 Mbps (VBR)
“480 × 270”: 0.5 Mbps (VBR)
“DHCP”
Set the DHCP setting.
When you set to “On,” the IP address is assigned
to the camcorder automatically.
To assign the IP address to the camcorder
manually, set to “Off.”
“IP Address”
Note
When “Bit Rate” of the streaming setting is set to a
setting higher than “6Mbps,” “9Mbps (VBR)” cannot be
set.
Input the IP address of the camcorder. This
setting is available only when “DHCP” is set to
“Off.”
“Subnet mask”
About the Web Menu
75
Input the subnet mask of the camcorder. This
setting is available only when “DHCP” is set to
“Off.”
Access point mode
“Gateway”
Input the default gateway for the access point.
This setting is available only when “DHCP” is set
to “Off.”
“Primary DNS Server”
Input the primary DNS server for the access
point. This setting is available only when
“DHCP” is set to “Off.”
Station mode
“Secondary DNS Server”
Recording
Input the secondary DNS server for the access
point. This setting is available only when
“DHCP” is set to “Off.”
“Submit”
Confirms the wireless LAN settings.
To connect to the access point in the station
mode without the WPS function
1
2
Connect the device to the camcorder in
the access point mode (page 60).
Set the items on the “Station Settings”
screen.
Perform settings in accordance with the
access point settings.
For details about the access point settings,
see the operating instructions of the access
point.
3
Upload Settings
You can register the server for uploading a proxy
file or an original file that is recorded on the
camcorder, or change the server setting that is
registered.
Delete the registered
server.
Change the
server settings.
Select the server.
Touch “Submit.”
The set items are confirmed.
4
Select “Access Point” for “Network
Mode” in the NETWORK SET menu
(page 114).
The camcorder starts connecting in the
station mode. Access the camcorder from the
device by performing procedure from step 8
of “Connecting to the access point with the
WPS function” (page 62).
Checking the wireless LAN settings
Display the screen for checking the wireless LAN
settings by touching “Wireless LAN” > “Status.”
The displayed items differ depending on the
wireless LAN mode of the camcorder.
76
About the Web Menu
Turn the auto upload
Register the server.
function on/off.
“Auto Upload On/Off”
When “Auto Upload On/Off” is set to “On” and
the camcorder is connected to the Internet, the
camcorder automatically uploads a proxy file to
the server that is set to the default server at
“Upload Setting” after recording.
“Sony Ci” is set for the server as the default.
Sony Ci is “Media Cloud Services” that is
provided by Sony. You can upload files to the
Sony cloud service, Sony Ci.
Input the server name that is displayed on the list.
Note
To use Sony Ci, registration is required.
For more details, please visit www.SonyMCS.com/
wireless
To register “Sony Ci”
1
Make sure that “Sony Ci” is displayed
on the “Upload Settings” screen, then
touch “Edit.”
The setting screen for Sony Ci appears.
2
“Host Name”
Input the address of the server.
“User”
Input the user name of the server.
“Password”
Input the password of the server.
Input the user name in “User” and
password in “Password.”
“PASV Mode”
For more details, please visit
www.SonyMCS.com/wireless
“Destination Directory”
Touch “Link.”
“Using Secure Protocol”
After a few moments, the completion
message appears.
Set whether to perform secure FTP uploading.
Note
“Link” is the operation to associate the user with the
camcorder. To perform “Link,” you need to connect
the camcorder to the Internet.
4
Displays the server type.
“FTP”: FTP server
Touch “OK.”
Note
After registering with Sony Ci, “Unlink” will
appear on the setting screen. If you touch “Unlink,”
the current user account will be unlinked, and you
can link with a different user account.
Register the server for uploading
The setting screen appears by touching “Create
New.”
Turn the PASV mode on/off.
Specify the directory for uploading.
Recording
3
“Service”
“Load Certification”
Reads the CA certificate.
* Format the certificate that is read in PEM format and
store it on the root directory of an SD card with the file
name, “certification.pem.”
“Clear Certification”
Clear the CA certificate.
Note
Using FTPS is recommended because FTP
communications are not encrypted.
Changing the registered server settings
Touch “Edit” after selecting the server for which
you want to change the settings on the “Upload
Settings” screen. Change the settings on the
screen for changing the settings.
For details about the setting items, see “Register
the server for uploading” (page 77).
Deleting the registered server
Touch “Delete” after selecting the server that you
want to delete on the “Upload Settings” screen.
When the confirmation screen appears, touch
“OK.” The selected server is deleted and the
display returns to the previous screen.
The setting is applied by touching “OK.” To
cancel, touch “Cancel.”
“Default Server”
When you set to “On,” the server takes priority
for displaying the server name on the list when
uploading.
“Display Name”
About the Web Menu
77
Starting file transferring
automatically after recording
Set “Auto upload” to “On” to automatically start
transferring the file that is stored on an SD card
after recording.
Note
Recording
The target folder is named after the set folder
selected in “Selecting the File and Uploading”
(page 67). When a target folder is not set, it is
named in date format. To change the target folder,
perform settings in “Selecting the file and
uploading.”
Re-starting file transferring
(Resume function)
If file transferring fails, the file transferring starts
where transferring failed when re-transferring.
Note
This function is available only on a server that is
compatible with the resume function.
To cancel or start uploading, or delete a file from
the file list
1
Select the file on the list.
2
Touch
screen.
Select the item.
• “Abort selected”: Cancels uploading the
selected file.
• “Delete from list”: Deletes the selected file
from the list.
• “Start selected”: Starts uploading the
selected file.
• “Select All”: Selects all files on the list.
• “Clear completed”: Deletes the list of all
the uploaded files.
Error/Warning Indicator
If the camcorder detects an error on the device
that is connected via wireless LAN, the error
message appears on the “Device Status” screen
(page 73).
Type
Checking the File Transferring
(Job List)
You can check the list of the files to be uploaded,
the file that is being uploaded, cancel or start the
file upload, and delete the file from the file list.
The camcorder is compatible with the FTP
resume function (re-upload function for a file
whose transfer was suspended).
at the upper right of the
Error/
Description
warning ID
Hard
E01-003
E01-004
E01-005
AV
E02-002
Communication E03-001
E03-002
E03-003
E03-004
E03-005
E03-006
E03-007
Media
W04-001
W04-002
E04-003
E04-004
W04-005
W04-006
• “Total”: Progress of all the files to be uploaded.
• “Status”: Progress of the file that is currently
being uploaded.
• “Remain Time”: Estimated remaining time for
uploading.
• “Transfer data rate”: Transfer rate indication.
78
About the Web Menu
E04-007
Device Error
3G/4G Device Error
Firmware update error
SDI Signal Error
Communication Error
Not supported device
File Transfer Error
Firmware update error
Authentication failed*
Server Capacity Over
IP Address setting
error
No Media
Media Capacity Over
Read Error
Write Error (other
than Media Capacity
Over)
Locked Media
Media Full (reached
to 600 clips)
Not supported media
* Sony Ci authentication is expired, or FTP server
authentication failed.
Playback
Thumbnail Screens
When you press the THUMBNAIL button (page 10), clips recorded on the SxS memory card are
displayed as thumbnails on the screen. If no clips are recorded on the card, a no-clip message is displayed.
You can start playback from the clip selected on the thumbnail screen. The playback picture can be seen
on the LCD monitor/EVF and external monitors.
Press the STOP/CAM button (page 10) to exit the thumbnail screen and return to the recording screen.
Note
Even if the SxS memory card contains a mixture of HD and SD clips, the normal thumbnail screen shows only clips of
the mode selected in “HD/SD” in “System” (page 121) of the OTHERS menu.
To display all recorded clips regardless of the HD/SD Mode, switch the screen to the All-Clip thumbnail screen (page 80).
Configuration of the Thumbnail Screen
The icon of the current SxS memory card is highlighted, shading the nonselected
one. (If the card is write-protected, a lock icon is displayed to the left.)
Playback
Data for the clip selected with the cursor are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Current clip No./ Total number of clips
Cursor
(yellow)
01 / JAN / 2009 10 : 53 S&Q 29 / 24
JPAN0011( 1 )
HQ 1920 / 23.9P
1. Thumbnail
In UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode: The
thumbnail image for each clip is an index frame
from the clip. When recording, the first frame of
a clip is automatically set as the index frame.
This frame can be adjusted (page 88). If the clip
is locked or is set with an OK mark, the lock
mark
is displayed.
In FAT SD mode: The thumbnail image for each
clip is the first frame of the clip. If the file was
split into multiple parts because its file size
exceeded 2 GB, the take mark
is displayed.
MP4
Split files can be viewed via the EXPAND CLIP
screen (page 86).
2. Date and starting time of recording
3. Clip name
In FAT SD Mode, if the file was split into
multiple parts because its file size exceeded 2
GB, the segment number is displayed after the
name, separated with a slash.
Thumbnail Screens
79
4. Lock mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD
Mode)
UDF and exFAT: A lock mark appears if the
selected clip is locked.
FAT HD Mode: A lock mark appears if the
selected clip has an OK mark.
5. AV independent file icon (UDF, exFAT,
and FAT HD Mode)
Displayed only if the selected clip is an AV
independent file. This indicates that not all
operations and indications may be available,
because the clip may have been added manually
to the SxS file via a computer, etc., and there is
no management file for it.
6. Recording video format
7. GPS positioning information (exFAT/
XAVC format)
Playback
If GPS positioning information is contained in a
recorded clip, the
icon appears.
8. File format
The file format (MXF, MP4, AVI) of the
selected clip is displayed. (This item is not
indicated when the recording mode is UDF HD
Mode or exFAT HD.)
9. Duration of the clip
10. Timecode
The timecode of the index frame is displayed.
11. OK/NG/KP mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT
HD Mode)
UDF and exFAT: The mark is displayed if the
selected clip has an OK/NG/KP flag.
FAT HD Mode: The OK mark is displayed if the
selected clip has an OK mark.
12. Special recording information (UDF,
exFAT, and FAT HD Mode)
If the selected clip was recorded in a special
recording mode (Slow & Quick Motion, Interval
Recording, or Frame Recording), the mode is
displayed.
Clips recorded in Slow & Quick Motion display
the “Recording frame rate/playback frame rate
fps” to the right.
Changing the Type of Thumbnail
Screen
The type of thumbnail screen can be changed as
follows by pressing the THUMBNAIL button
(page 10).
80
Thumbnail Screens
UDF, exFAT
The normal thumbnail screen, OK/NG/KP/None
clip thumbnail screen, and All-Clip thumbnail
screen are cyclically displayed.
FAT HD Mode
The normal thumbnail screen, OK clip thumbnail
screen, and All-Clip thumbnail screen are
cyclically displayed.
FAT SD Mode
The normal thumbnail screen and All-Clip
thumbnail screen are alternately displayed.
OK/NG/KP/None-Clip thumbnail screen
Only the clips flagged OK/NG/KP—or clips with
no flag (“None”)—among the clips on the current
SxS memory card are displayed.
You can select the type of flag to display with
“Filter Clips” in “Clip” (page 122) of the
OTHERS menu.
OK-Clip thumbnail screen
Only the clips marked OK among the clips on the
current SxS memory card are displayed.
All-Clip thumbnail screen
The All-Clip thumbnail screen shows all clips on
the current SxS memory card regardless of the
HD or SD Mode, permitting you to check whether
the card contains any clips of another mode than
that currently selected.
Note
You cannot start playback from the All-Clip thumbnail
screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL button again to return to the
normal thumbnail screen, and playback and clip
operations are enabled.
Switching the SxS memory cards
When two memory cards are loaded, press the
SLOT SELECT button (page 12) to switch
memory cards.
Note
Card switching is enabled only when the thumbnail
screen is displayed or when an external input picture is
displayed by pressing the STOP/CAM button.
You cannot switch memory cards during playback.
Continuous playback of cards in slots A and B is not
possible.
Playing Clips
For playback operations, use the playback control
buttons on the handle (page 10). When the IR
Remote Commander is enabled, you can use its
playback control buttons instead (page 21).
Information displayed on the playback
screen
The following information is superimposed on
the playback picture.
1
120min
2
B PLAY
3
4
5
TCR 00:00:00:00
0011/03 00
Playing the Selected and
Subsequent Clips in Sequence
1
CH1
CH2
7
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
selected clip.
Notes
• The playback picture may be momentarily distorted or
frozen between clips. The playback control buttons
and THUMBNAIL button do not function during this
condition.
• When you select a clip on the thumbnail screen and
start playback, the playback picture at the beginning of
the clip may be distorted. To start playback without
distortion, once pause playback after starting it, press
the PREV button to return to the top of the clip, then
restart playback.
1. Battery remaining/DC IN voltage
2. Playback mode
3. SxS memory card
Playback
2
Using the up/down/left/right buttons or
the jog dial, move the cursor to the
thumbnail image of the clip with which
you wish to start playback.
A
mark appears to the left if the SxS memory
card is write-protected.
4. Time data
The time data for the playback picture are
displayed. Each time you press the
DURATION/TC/U-BIT button, the indication
is switched between timecode (TCR) and userbit (UB) data.
5. Clip no./total number of clips
This is displayed for FAT. It is also displayed
for UDF and exFAT if “Find Mode” in “Clip”
(page 122) of the OTHERS menu is set to
“Clip.”
6. Clip no./total number of clips, essence
mark no./total number of essence marks
This is displayed for UDF and exFAT if “Find
Mode” in “Clip” (page 122) of the OTHERS
menu is set to “Rec Start.”
7. Audio levels
The audio levels for the recording are displayed.
Playing Clips
81
Monitoring Audio
In Normal playback mode, you can monitor the
recorded audio signals through the built-in
speaker (page 9) or connected headphones.
With the headphones connected to the headphone
connector (page 8), the built-in speaker is turned
off.
Press the VOLUME buttons (page 10) to adjust
the sound volume.
You can select audio channel(s) to be monitored
with “Audio Output” (page 105) of the AUDIO
SET menu.
Clip Operations
During thumbnail screen playback, etc., you can
operate the clips or confirm and change the
subsidiary data for clips using the Clip Operation
menus. The corresponding Clip Operation menu
pops up on the screens as shown below when you
press the SEL/SET button or the jog dial.
Clip Operation Menus
Thumbnail screen (page 83)
Cueing Up
CANCEL
DISP CLIP INFO
Playback
To start playback from the top of the first clip
Press the PREV button and F REV button
simultaneously. The top of the first-recorded clip
on the memory card is cued up.
To start playback from the top of the last clip
Press the F FWD button and NEXT button
simultaneously. The top of the last-recorded clip
on the memory card is cued up.
OK MARK ADD (FAT only)
OK MARK DELETE (FAT only)
OK FLAG ADD (UDF and exFAT)
NG FLAG ADD (UDF and exFAT)
KEEP FLAG ADD (UDF and exFAT)
CLIP FLAG DELETE (UDF and exFAT)
LOCK CLIP (UDF and exFAT)
Adding Shot Marks During
Playback (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD
Mode)
In the same manner as in recording, you can add
shot marks to the clip during playback.
At the point where you wish to add a shot
mark, press the “Shot Mark1” or “Shot
Mark2” assigned button.
Notes
• No shot mark can be added if the memory card is writeprotected.
• No shot mark can be added to the first or last frame of
a clip.
82
Clip Operations
UNLOCK CLIP (UDF and exFAT)
COPY CLIP
DELETE CLIP
ALL MARKS
SHOT MARK1
SHOT MARK2
REC START MARK (UDF and exFAT)
EXPAND CLIP
Expand Clip screen (page 87)
CANCEL
EXPAND (COARSE)
Clip Operation menu on the thumbnail
screen
PAUSE
Pressing the SEL/SET button or the jog dial with
the thumbnail screen (page 79) displayed calls the
Clip Operation menu for the clip at the cursor.
SET INDEX PIC
Item
EXPAND (FINE)
SHOT MARK1 ADD
SHOT MARK2 ADD
SHOT MARK1 DEL
SHOT MARK2 DEL
DIVIDE CLIP (FAT only)
Shot Mark screen (page 88)
CANCEL
PAUSE
SHOT MARK1 DEL
SHOT MARK2 DEL
DIVIDE CLIP (FAT only)
Note
Selectable menu items are limited in SD Mode.
Basic Operations of the Clip
Operation Menus
Use the up/down/left/right buttons or the jog dial
to select a menu item, then press the SEL/SET
button or the jog dial.
Pressing the CANCEL button restores the
previous condition.
Selecting “CANCEL” from a Clip Operation
menu turns the Clip Operation menu off.
Notes
• When the SxS memory card is write-protected, some
operations are unavailable.
• There may be items that cannot be selected depending
on the status when the menu is displayed.
Playback
SET INDEX PIC
Function
DISP CLIP INFO Displays the clip's information
screen (page 84).
OK MARK
Adds an OK mark (page 85).
ADD 1)
OK MARK
Deletes the OK mark (page 85).
DELETE 1)
OK FLAG
Adds an OK flag (page 85).
ADD 2)
NG FLAG
Adds a NG flag (page 85).
ADD 2)
KEEP FLAG
Adds a KP flag (page 85).
ADD 2)
CLIP FLAG
Deletes the flag (page 85).
DELETE 2)
Locks and protects a clip (page
LOCK CLIP 2)
85).
UNLOCK CLIP 2) Unlocks a protected clip (page
85).
COPY CLIP
Copies the clip to another SxS
memory card (page 85).
DELETE CLIP
Deletes the clip (page 86).
ALL MARKS 3) Displays thumbnails of all frames
with an essence mark recorded
(page 87).
SHOT MARK1 3) Displays only thumbnails of
frames with shot mark 1 recorded
(page 87).
SHOT MARK2 3) Displays only thumbnails of
frames with shot mark 2 recorded
(page 87).
REC START
Displays thumbnails of frames
MARK
with a Recording Start mark and
the first frames of clips without
Recording Start marks (page 87).
EXPAND CLIP
Switches to the EXPAND CLIP
screen (page 86).
1) Effective with FAT HD Mode only.
2) Effective with UDF and exFAT only.
3) Effective with UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode.
Clip Operations
83
Displaying the Detailed Information of a Clip
Select “DISP CLIP INFO” from a Clip Operation menu.
4
120min
CL I P I NFO
JPAN0011( 1 )
OK
01 / JAN / 2009 10 : 53
HQ 1920 / 23.9 P
MP4
S&Q Mot i on 29 / 24fp s
TCR 00 : 05 : 00 : 02
TCR 00 : 05 : 00 : 00 STR
TCR 00 : 08 : 19 : 23 END
DUR 00 : 03 : 20 : 00
CH1/2 /3 /4 /5 /6 /7 /8
1
2
PREV CLI P
NEXT CL I P
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Playback
3
1. Image of the current clip
2. Image of the previous clip
Press the PREV button to switch to the clip info
screen of the previous clip.
In FAT SD Mode, the previous segment of a
segmented clip is displayed.
3. Image of the next clip
Press the NEXT button to switch to the clip info
screen of the next clip.
In FAT SD Mode, the next segment of a
segmented clip is displayed.
4. Clip name
For a clip name of 12 characters or longer, only
the first 5 and last 5 characters of the name are
displayed. To check the non-displayed block of
the name, press the jog dial or the SEL/SET
button to display the entire clip name (LongDisplay mode). Press the jog dial or the SEL/
SET button again to cancel Long-Display mode.
Long-Display mode is also canceled by
switching to the previous or next clip with the
PREV or NEXT button.
In FAT SD Mode, if the file was split into
multiple parts because its file size exceeded 2
GB, the segment number is displayed after the
name, separated with a slash.
5. Lock mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD
Mode)
UDF and exFAT: A lock mark appears if the
selected clip is locked.
FAT HD Mode: A lock mark appears if the
selected clip has an OK mark.
84
0011 / 0300
Clip Operations
6. OK/NG/KP mark (UDF, exFAT, and FAT
HD Mode)
UDF and exFAT: The mark is displayed if the
selected clip has an OK/NG/KP flag.
FAT HD Mode: The OK mark is displayed if the
selected clip has an OK mark.
7. GPS positioning information (exFAT/
XAVC format)
If GPS positioning information is contained in a
recorded clip, the
icon appears.
8. Date and starting time of recording
9. File format
The file format (MXF, MP4, AVI) of the
selected clip is displayed.
10. Special recording information (UDF,
exFAT, and FAT HD Mode)
If the selected clip was recorded in a special
recording mode (Slow & Quick Motion, Interval
Recording, or Frame Recording), the mode is
displayed.
Clips recorded in Slow & Quick Motion display
the “Recording frame rate/playback frame rate
fps” to the right.
11. Timecode of the displayed frame
12. Timecode at the recording starting point
13. Timecode at the recording ending point
14. Duration of the clip
15. Recorded audio channels
16. Recorded video format
Adding/Deleting a Flag (UDF and
exFAT)
You can add an OK/NG/KP flag to clips recorded
in UDF or exFAT. By adding flags, you can set
the camcorder to display only clips with certain
flag settings on the thumbnail screen (OK/NG/
KP/None-Clip thumbnail screen) (page 80).
When adding a flag, you can select from OK
FLAG ADD, NG FLAG ADD, and KEEP FLAG
ADD in the Clip Operation menu (page 83) on the
thumbnail screen. When deleting a flag, select
CLIP FLAG DELETE.
Note
Adding/Deleting the OK Mark (FAT
HD Mode Only)
By adding an OK mark to clips recorded in FAT
HD Mode, you can set the camcorder to display
only the necessary clips on the thumbnail screen
(page 80). Clips with an OK mark added are
blocked from being deleted or segmented. To
delete or segment them, remove the OK mark.
From the thumbnail screen Clip Operation menu
(page 83), you can select OK MARK ADD to add
an OK mark, or OK MARK DELETE to delete
the OK mark.
You can copy clips on an SxS memory card to
another SxS memory card.
Each clip is copied with the same name to the
destination SxS memory card.
Notes
• If there is another clip having the same name on the
destination SxS memory card, the clip is copied under
a name adding a single-digit number in parentheses to
the end of the original clip name.
The parenthetical number is the minimum value that
does not exist in the destination memory card.
Examples:
ABCD0002(1) if ABCD0002 exists
ABCD0002(2) if ABCD0002(1) exists
ABCD0005(4) if ABCD0005(3) exists
• When using FAT, you cannot copy a file 10 times or
more if clips with the same clip name followed by
parenthetical numbers (1) to (9) already exist on the
card.
• When using UDF or exFAT, you cannot copy a file
1000 times or more if clips with the same clip name
followed by parenthetical numbers (1) to (999) already
exist on the card.
• A warning message is displayed if there is not
sufficient space on the destination SxS memory card.
Replace the SxS memory card with one with sufficient
space.
• When copying an SxS memory card on which multiple
clips have been recorded, copying all clips to the end
may not be achieved, even if the destination card has
the same capacity as the source card, depending on
usage conditions, memory characteristics, etc.
Playback
Flagged clips are not protected. To protect clips from
deletion, select LOCK CLIP in the Clip Operation menu
(page 83) on the thumbnail screen. To remove the
protection, select UNLOCK CLIP.
Copying Clips
Copying a specified clip
You can copy a clip selected on the thumbnail
screen to another SxS memory card.
Select “COPY CLIP” from the Clip Operation
menu.
Copying clips collectively
By using the Setup menu, you can copy clips on
an SxS memory card collectively to another SxS
memory card.
If the memory card contains clips of both HD and
SD Mode, only the clips of the currently selected
mode are copied. This may be convenient when
you wish to extract clips of the same mode only.
Select “Clips” in “Copy All” (page 123) of the
OTHERS menu.
Clip Operations
85
The EXPAND CLIP screen appears for the
clip that you selected on the thumbnail
screen.
Deleting Clips
You can delete clips from the SxS memory card.
Select “DELETE CLIP” from the Clip Operation
menu.
EXPAND CLIP screen in UDF, exFAT, and
FAT HD Mode
Note
Clips with an OK mark and flagged clips set to LOCK
CLIP cannot be deleted.
To delete them, release the OK mark or the LOCK CLIP
setting before performing the delete operation.
Current frame number
120min
01 : 10 : 20 : 00
Deleting clips collectively
By using the Setup menu, you can delete clips
from an SxS memory card collectively.
Select “All Clips DEL” in “Clip” (page 122) of
the OTHERS menu.
Notes
Playback
• If the memory card contains clips of both HD and SD
Mode, only the clips of the currently selected mode are
deleted.
• Clips with an OK mark and flagged clips set to LOCK
CLIP cannot be deleted.
Displaying the EXPAND CLIP
Screen
In UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode, the
EXPAND CLIP screen permits you to divide a
clip into 12 blocks of equal duration and show a
thumbnail image of the first frame of each block
on the screen.
In FAT SD Mode, the EXPAND CLIP screen
shows the thumbnail images of the first frames of
the segment files only for a clip segmented
because its file size exceeded 2 GB.
This helps you to quickly cue up to a desired
scene in a clip of long duration.
You can display the EXPAND CLIP screen by
selecting the clip on the thumbnail screen.
Note
If GPS positioning information is contained in a recorded
clip, no icon appears on the EXPAND CLIP screen.
1
Select a clip on the thumbnail screen,
then press the SEL/SET button or the
jog dial.
The corresponding Clip Operation menu
pops up.
2
86
Select “EXPAND CLIP.”
Clip Operations
EXPAND CLIP
S1
01 : 11 : 00 : 00
01 : 11 : 40 : 00
S2
0000123
01 : 10 : 30 : 00
01 : 10 : 40 : 00
01 : 10 : 50 : 00
01 : 11 : 10 : 00
01 : 11 : 20 : 00
01 : 11 : 30 : 00
01 : 11 : 50 : 00
S2
01 : 12 : 00 : 00
01 / JAN / 2009 10 : 53 S&Q 29 / 24
JPAN0011( 1 )
HQ 1920 / 23 . 9 P
S1
01 : 12 : 10 : 00
TCR 01 : 10: 20 : 00
DUR 00 : 03 : 19 : 23
1
2
Detailed information for the clip is displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
The items other than the following are the same as
those on the normal thumbnail screen (page 79):
1. Frame information
The following icons show the marking for the
frame at the cursor.
Index frame
S1
S2
Frame with shot mark 1 added
Frame with shot mark 2 added
The same icons may also be displayed below the
thumbnail image of each frame. If the frame has
multiple markings, one of the icons is displayed,
in the priority order of index frame, shot mark 1,
and shot mark 2.
2. Timecode indication
The timecode of the frame at the cursor is
displayed.
EXPAND CLIP screen in FAT SD Mode
Current frame number
120min
EXPAND CLIP
00 : 00 : 00 : 00
00 : 09 : 30 : 00
0000001
Item
Function
SHOT MARK1
DEL
SHOT MARK2
DEL
DIVIDE CLIP
To delete shot mark 1 from the
selected frame (page 88)
To delete shot mark 2 from the
selected frame (page 88)
To divide the clip into two clips at
the selected frame (page 88)
00 : 19 : 00 : 00
FAT SD Mode
You can select “PAUSE” only on the EXPAND
CLIP screen in FAT SD Mode.
01 / JAN /2009 10 : 53
JPAN0011 _01
DVCAM29.9PsF SQ
TCR 00 : 00 : 00 : 00
DUR 00 : 09 : 30 : 00
1
2
1. Timecode indication
The timecode of the segmentation file at the
cursor is displayed.
2. Duration
The duration of the segmentation file at the
cursor is displayed.
Clip Operation menu on the EXPAND CLIP
screen
UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD Mode
When you select a frame on the EXPAND CLIP
screen and press the SEL/SET button or the jog
dial, the Clip Operation menu pops up to enable
operations such as displaying more detailed split
displays and saving the frames after the selected
frame as different clip.
Item
EXPAND
(COARSE)
EXPAND
(FINE)
PAUSE
When one or more shot marks or recording start
marks are recorded for a single clip, you can
display only frames with those marks as
thumbnail images on the screen.
Note
If GPS positioning information is contained in a recorded
clip, no icon appears on the SHOT MARK screen.
1
Select a clip on the thumbnail screen,
then press the SEL/SET button or the
jog dial.
2
Select ALL MARK, SHOT MARK1,
SHOT MARK2, or REC START
MARK from the Clip Operation menu
(page 83).
SHOT MARK screen example (when ALL
MARKS is selected)
Function
To decrease the number of
partitions of the clip
To increase the number of
partitions of the clip
To set to Pause mode at the
selected frame
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for
the index frame of the clip (page
88)
SHOT MARK1
To add shot mark 1 to the selected
ADD
frame (page 88)
SHOT MARK2
To add shot mark 2 to the selected
ADD
frame (page 88)
Playback
Detailed information for the clip is displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
The items other than the following are the same as
those on the normal thumbnail screen (page 79):
Displaying the SHOT MARK
Screen (UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD
Mode)
120min
SHOT MARK1
S1
01 : 10 : 20 : 00
S2
01 : 10 : 30 : 00
S1
01 : 11 : 00 : 00
S1
01 : 11 : 10 : 00
- - -
- - -
0031 / 0031
S2
01 : 10 : 40 : 00
- - -
- - -
01 / JAN / 2009 10 : 53 S&Q 29 / 24
JPAN0011( 1 )
HQ 1920 / 23 . 9 P
S1
01 : 10 : 50 : 00
- - -
- - -
TCR 01 : 12: 00 : 00
DUR 00 : 03 : 19 : 23
1
The detailed information of the clip is displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
Clip Operations
87
The items other than the following are the same as
those on the EXPAND CLIP screen (page 86) in
UDF, exFAT, and FAT HD mode:
1. Timecode indication
The timecode of the frame at the cursor on the
SHOT MARK screen is displayed.
Move the cursor to the first/last frame
When the cursor is at a user-designated position,
press the F REV and PREV buttons
simultaneously to move the cursor the first frame.
Press the F FWD and NEXT buttons
simultaneously to move the cursor to the last
frame.
Playback
Switch to the clip shot mark screen for a different
clip
When the cursor is at the first frame for a clip,
press the PREV or up button, or turn the jog dial
up to switch to the previous displayable clip shot
mark screen.
When the cursor is at the last frame for a clip,
press the NEXT or down button, or turn the jog
dial down to switch to the next displayable clip
shot mark screen.
Clip Operation menu on the SHOT MARK
screen
When you select a frame on the SHOT MARK
screen and press the SEL/SET button or the jog
dial, the Clip Operation menu pops up to permit
you further operations.
Item
Function
PAUSE
To set to Pause mode at the selected
frame
SET INDEX PIC To specify the selected frame for the
index frame of the clip (page 88)
SHOT MARK1 To delete the shot mark 1 from the
DEL
selected frame (page 88)
SHOT MARK2 To delete the shot mark 2 from the
DEL
selected frame (page 88)
DIVIDE CLIP
To divide the clip into two clips at
the selected frame (page 88) (FAT
HD mode Only)
Adding/Deleting Shot Marks (UDF,
exFAT, and FAT HD Mode)
Adding a shot mark in Pause mode
Select “SHOT MARK1 ADD” or “SHOT
MARK2 ADD” from the Clip Operation menu.
88
Clip Operations
Adding a shot mark on the EXPAND CLIP
screen
Select “SHOT MARK1 ADD” or “SHOT
MARK2 ADD” from the Clip Operation menu.
Deleting a shot mark
You can delete shot marks on the EXPAND CLIP
screen (page 86) or on the SHOT MARK screen
(page 87).
Select “SHOT MARK1 DEL” or “SHOT
MARK2 DEL” from the Clip Operation menu.
Changing the Index Frame (UDF,
exFAT, and FAT HD Mode)
You can change the index frame to another frame
you selected on the EXPAND CLIP screen (page
86) or the SHOT MARK screen (page 87).
Select “SET INDEX PIC” from the Clip
Operation menu.
Note
Even if you specify a frame other than the top frame for
the index frame, playback always begins from the top
frame when you start it from the thumbnail screen.
Dividing a Clip (FAT HD Mode
Only)
In FAT HD Mode, you can divide a clip into two
different clips at the frame you select on the
EXPAND CLIP screen (page 86) or the SHOT
MARK screen (page 87).
Select “DIVIDE CLIP” from the Clip Operation
menu.
The first 4 characters of the original clip name are
carried on, continuing to the last number on the
memory card by the second 4 numerics.
Example: If you divide a clip named ABCD0002
into two clips under the condition where a
new clip will be named EFGH0100, clip
ABCD0100 and clip ABCD0101 are created.
Note
If the remaining space on the memory card is insufficient
for divided clips, a message informing you of it appears.
Zebra: Zebra status
Showing the Status
Screens
Press the STATUS button (page 10) to display
status screens on the LCD monitor/EVF screen/
external video monitor.
Use the up/down buttons (page 10) or the jog dial
(page 11) to perform operations and switch the
screens in sequence.
When you press the STATUS button again, the
status screen display is canceled.
For connections of an external monitor, see
“Connecting External Monitors and Recording
Devices” on page 126.
White Bal: White balance status
Display Contents
B
A
PRST
The color temperature stored in white
memory B is indicated.
The color temperature stored in white
memory A is indicated.
The color temperature set as the preset
white is indicated. The color temperature of
preset white can be changed using the
PICTURE PROFILE menu.
Gain: GAIN switch settings
The gain values of the positions L, M, and H of
the GAIN switch assigned of the CAMERA SET
menu are displayed.
Handle Zoom Speed: Handle zoom speed
settings
The zoom speed that is set at “High”/“Low” of
“Zoom Speed” (page 98) of the CAMERA SET
menu are displayed.
Display Contents
L
H
Zoom speed that is set at “Low” of “Zoom
Speed.”
Zoom speed that is set at “High” of “Zoom
Speed.”
1
2
“On” is displayed and the setting of
“Zebra1 Level” in “Zebra” of the LCD/VF
SET menu is displayed to the right when
“Zebra Select” in “Zebra” of the LCD/VF
SET menu is set to “1” or “Both” and you
set the Zebra function to “On.” If the Zebra
function is set to “Off” or “Zebra Select” is
set to “2,” “Off” appears.
“On” is displayed when “Zebra Select” in
“Zebra” of the LCD/VF SET menu is set to
“2” or “Both” and you set the Zebra
function to “On.” If the Zebra function is
set to “Off” or “Zebra Select” is set to “1,”
“Off” appears.
Skin Tone Detail: Skin-tone detail status
The current status (On or Off) of “Setting” of
“Skin Tone Detail” of the PICTURE PROFILE
menu is displayed.
Picture Profile: Picture Profile selection status
The selected Picture Profile number and name are
displayed. (If Picture Profile is off, “Off” is
displayed.)
Playback
Camera Status Screen
Display Contents
Audio Status Screen
Output CH: External output/headphone output
Depending on the setting of “Output CH” in
“Audio Output” of the AUDIO SET menu and the
setting of “Monitor CH,” the audio channel(s)
external output and headphones output is
displayed as follows.
• CH-1: When left/right are CH-1
• CH-2: When left/right are CH-2
• CH-3: When left/right are CH-3
• CH-4: When left/right are CH-4
• CH-1/CH-2: When left is CH-1 and right is CH2 (stereo)
• CH-3/CH-4: When left is CH-3 and right is CH4 (stereo)
• CH-1+CH-2: When both left and right are CH1 and CH-2 (monaural)
• CH-3+CH-4: When both left and right are CH3 and CH-4 (monaural)
Speaker: Speaker output
The audio channel(s) output to the internal
speaker is displayed.
As the speaker is monaural, CH-1+CH-2 or CH3+CH-4 is displayed when “Monitor CH” is set to
Showing the Status Screens
89
Playback
stereo. With non-stereo settings, the setting of
“Monitor CH” in “Audio Output” of the AUDIO
SET menu is displayed as it is.
i.LINK I/O: Input and output for i.LINK
The “i.LINK” setting in “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
Select” of the VIDEO SET menu is displayed.
CH-1/CH-2/CH-3/CH-4: Audio level meters
The 4-channel audio level meters (2 meters when
using 2-channel settings) and input source are
displayed.
While recording (or standing by to record), the
level of the audio inputs (the EE audio levels) are
displayed. During playback, the audio playback
level is displayed according to the setting of
“Output CH” in “Audio Output” of the AUDIO
SET menu.
If audio is input from the i.LINK (HDV/DV)
connector while displaying thumbnails, while
playback is stopped, or while recording an
external signal, the audio input level is displayed.
In this case, the leftmost channels that are
displayed are CH-1 and CH-2, regardless of the
setting of “Output CH” in “Audio Output” of the
AUDIO SET menu.
Down Converter: SD output down-converter
setting
In HD Mode, the “Down Converter” setting
(Squeeze, Letterbox, Edge Crop) of the VIDEO
SET menu is displayed.
In SD Mode, “Edge Crop” is displayed when EC
(Edge Crop) in “Format” in “System” of the
OTHERS menu is selected, and “Squeeze” is
displayed when SQ (Squeeze) in “Format” in
“System” of the OTHERS menu is selected.
Wind Filter
The “On”/“Off” setting of Wind Filter is
displayed to the right of each input source. Wind
Filter settings can be made from “Wind Filter
CH1” to “Wind Filter CH4” in “Audio Input” of
the AUDIO SET menu.
Assign Button: Assignable button statuses
The functions assigned with the “Assign Button”
of the OTHERS menu to the respective
assignable buttons are displayed.
23.98P Output: 23.98P output mode
The “23.98P Output” setting (23.98PsF, 59.94i
(2-3 Pull Down)) of the VIDEO SET menu is
displayed.
Button/Remote Status Screen
IR Remote: IR Remote Commander status
The “IR Remote” setting of the OTHERS menu is
displayed.
Video Status Screen
Battery/Media Status Screen
Video Format
Video Format: Video format setting
The number of vertical lines, frame rate, and scan
format (i/P) of the video format set in “Format” in
“System” of the OTHERS menu are displayed.
Rec Mode: Recording bit rate
The video format set in “Format” in “System” of
the OTHERS menu is displayed.
3G SDI OUT Level: Data mapping method of the
3G SDI signal
The data mapping method of the 3G SDI signal
set in “3G SDI OUT Level A/B” of the VIDEO
SET menu is displayed.
SDI Output: Output for SDI
The “SDI” setting in “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
Select” of the VIDEO SET menu is displayed.
HDMI Output: Output for HDMI
The “HDMI” setting in “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
Select” of the VIDEO SET menu is displayed.
90
Showing the Status Screens
Battery: Battery charge remaining
The remaining charge level of the mounted
battery pack is displayed.
Charge Count: Repeated charge times
The number of times that the mounted battery
pack has been charged is displayed.
HDD A/HDD B: Battery remaining of PHU-220R
units
When professional hard disk units are connected,
the remaining power levels of the batteries of the
professional hard disk units connected via the
respective card slots are displayed.
Media A/Media B: Remaining space, available
recording time, and estimated service life
(rewriting limit)
The remaining space of the SxS memory cards in
the respective card slots is indicated on the
meters.
At the right, the available time for recording if
done at the current bit rate is displayed, in
minutes.
The time indication will be “- - min” if no SxS
memory card or an invalid card is in the slot.
If the card is write-protected, a
icon is shown
to the right of the time indication.
The Life value is displayed only for an SxS
memory card which supports the life value
indication. It indicates the estimated remaining
usable period of the card (virgin status as 100%).
If an alarm is generated, make a backup of the
card as soon as possible and replace it with a new
card.
REAL: Current data and time
Displays current data and time of the camcorder.
Displays according to the setting in “Clock Set”
of the OTHERS menu.
TIME ZONE: Time zone
Displays the setting in “Time Zone” of the
OTHERS menu.
Notes
• While “GPS” of the OTHERS menu is set to “Off” and
during playing back, “---” is displayed except for
“REAL” and “TIME ZONE.”
• Right after “GPS” of the OTHERS menu is set to
“On”, “---” is displayed except for “REAL” and
“TIME ZONE” until positioning information is
obtained.
• When the positioning status changes to the detecting
status, the last obtained positioning information is
displayed. If information is not obtained for some
items, “---” may be displayed for the items.
Playback
SD Card: Remaining space and available
recording time of an SD card
The remaining space of the SD card in the SD
card slot is indicated on the meters.
At the right, the available time for recording is
displayed.
The time indication will be “- - min” if no SD card
or an invalid card is in the SD card slot.
Displays “---” when there is no positioning
information.
GPS positioning status indication
GPS: GPS positioning status
Displays the positioning status for the current
GPS signal as icons.
DOP: Horizontal dilution of precision
Displays positioning accuracy.
Displays “---” when there is no positioning
information.
LATITUDE: Latitude
Displays latitude information.
Displays “---” when there is no positioning
information.
LONGITUDE: Longitude
Displays longitude information.
Displays “---” when there is no positioning
information.
ALTITUDE: Altitude
Displays altitude information.
Displays “---” when there is no positioning
information.
CALC: Positioning date and time
Displays time and date when positioning
information is obtained.
Displays according to the setting in “Clock Set”
of the OTHERS menu.
Showing the Status Screens
91
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Overview of the Setup Menus
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Press the MENU button to display setup menus
on the LCD monitor/EVF screen with settings
necessary for recording and playback. (You can
also display setup menus on an external monitor.)
Set items by selecting them from the following
menus.
CAMERA SET menu: For setting items related
to recording other than those for picture quality.
(For picture quality-related items, use the
PICTURE PROFILE menu (page 47).)
AUDIO SET menu: For setting audio-related
items.
VIDEO SET menu: For setting video outputrelated items.
LCD/VF SET menu: For setting items related to
the LCD monitor/EVF display.
TC/UB SET menu: For setting items related to
timecodes and user bits.
NETWORK SET Menu: for setting networkrelated items.
OTHERS menu: For setting other items.
Setup Menu Layers
MENU
CAMERA SET
Gain Setup
Shutter
SLS/EX SLS
MF Assist
Color Bars
Flicker Reduce
Handle Zoom
Zoom Speed
Zoom Transition
Interval Rec
Frame Rec
Clip Cont.Rec
P.Cache Rec
S&Q Motion
Simul Rec
Proxy
Rec Review
TLCS
Shockless White
White Switch<B>
ATW Speed
ATW Mode
Image Inversion
Auto Black Bal.
Video Light Set
AUDIO SET
Audio Input
Audio Output
VIDEO SET
Input Source Select
SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
Select
3G SDI OUT Level A/B
SDI/HDMI/Video Out
Super
Down Converter
23.98P Output
SDI Rec Control
Match Clip Name
(continues)
92
Overview of the Setup Menus
LCD
EVF
Peaking
Marker
Zebra
Display On/Off
TC/UB SET
Timecode
Users Bit
TC Format
NETWORK SET
NW&Proxy/USB
Network Mode
Streaming
Streaming Edit
Proxy File
Wi-Fi Remote
NFC
WPS
SSID & Key
Regenerate Key
Channel
IP Address
Wired LAN Set
User Name
Password
Network Reset
Wi-Fi Version
Wi-Fi Ver.Up
OTHERS
All Reset
Camera Data
Time Zone
Clock Set
Language
Assign Button
Tally
Hours Meter
IR Remote
Battery Alarm
Battery INFO
Genlock
Direct Menu
Trigger Mode
System
Clip
Copy All
Format Media
Plan.Metadata
GPS
Fan Control
Version
Version Up
Menu Scroll
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
LCD/VF SET
Overview of the Setup Menus
93
Basic Menu Operations
Menu controls
MENU button (page 10)
To turn Menu mode to use Setup menus on/off.
Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, SEL/SET button
(page 10)
When you press the up/down/left/right buttons,
the cursor moves in the corresponding direction,
permitting you to select menu items or setting
values.
Press the SEL/SET button to enter the highlighted
item.
Jog dial (SEL/SET dial) (page 11)
When you turn the dial, the cursor moves up or
down, permitting you to select menu items or
setting values.
Press the jog dial to select the highlighted item.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
94
CANCEL button (page 10)
To return to the previous layer of the menu. An
uncompleted change is canceled.
Note
In Focus Magnifier mode (page 34), the setup
menu cannot be used. Press the FOCUS MAG
button to exit this mode.
Basic Menu Operations
Setting the Setup menus
Rotate the jog dial or press the up/down/left/right
buttons to set the cursor to the icon of the menu
you wish to set, then push the jog dial or SEL/
SET button to select that menu.
• The menu item selection area can show 7 lines
at maximum. When all the selectable items
cannot be displayed at one time, you can scroll
the display up or down by moving the cursor. A
triangle appears at the upper or lower right
corner of the menu item selection area to
indicate that scrolling is enabled.
• For items having a wide range of available
values (example: –99 to +99), the available
value area is not displayed. The current setting
is highlighted instead, indicating that the setting
is ready for change.
• When you select “Execute” for an execution
item, the corresponding function is executed.
• When you select an item that you must confirm
before execution, the menu display temporarily
disappears, and a confirmation message is
displayed. Following the instructions of the
message, and specify whether to execute or
cancel.
Entering a character string
When you select an item for which a character
string, such as a time value or filename, is to be
specified, the input area for the character string is
highlighted, and “SET” appears at the right end.
1
Select characters by pressing the up/
down/left/right buttons or turning the
jog dial, then press the SEL/SET button
or the jog dial to proceed.
The cursor moves to the next column.
To return to the previous column, press the
left button.
2
Perform setting in the same manner up
to the last column/digit.
The cursor moves to “SET.”
3
Press the jog dial or the SEL/SET
button.
The setting is completed.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Basic Menu Operations
95
Setup Menu List
The functions and available settings of menus are listed below.
The default settings set at the factory are shown in bold face (example: Speed). The items marked with
[M] in the Menu items column cannot be set while displaying the thumbnail screen or during playback
operations.
CAMERA SET Menu
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Gain Setup
Low
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the L
position.
Mid
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 /18 dB
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the M
position.
High
–3 / 0 / 3 / 6 / 9 /12 / 18 dB
Set the gain level to be used when the switch is set to the H
position.
Assigning gain
levels to the three
GAIN switch
positions
Shutter
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
96
Mode
Speed / Angle / ECS
Specifying
operating
conditions of the
electrical shutter
Unselectable when
Slow Shutter
mode/
Supersensitized
Slow Shutter mode Shutter Speed
is set.
1/32, 1/33, 1/40, 1/48, 1/50,
1/60, 1/96, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125,
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
Select modes of the Electronic Shutter.
Speed mode/Angle mode (standard modes): These modes
may be especially effective when you wish to record a
quick-moving subject with minimal blurring. You can
select Speed mode to specify the shutter speed in seconds,
or Angle mode to specify the shutter speed by the shutter
angle.
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode: This mode may be used to
shoot a monitor screen, eliminating horizontal bands.
Set the shutter speed when Speed mode is selected. The
available setting values vary depending on the frame
frequency of the video format selected.
Set the shutter angle when Angle mode is selected. The
Shutter Angle
11.25º / 22.5º / 45º / 72º / 86.4º / following frame rates are unavailable when “S&Q Motion” is
set from “1” to “16”: 72°, 86.4°, 144°, 150°, 172.8°, 216°.
90º / 144º / 150º / 172.8º /
180º / 216º
ECS Frequency
60.00
Setup Menu List
Set the ECS frequency when ECS mode is selected. The
available setting values vary depending on the frame
frequency of the video format selected.
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
SLS/EX SLS
Setting
OFF / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 /
16 / 32 / 64
Setting the Slow
Shutter mode/
Supersensitized
Slow Shutter mode
MF Assist
Setting the Color
Bars
On / Off
Set to “On” to precisely adjust the focus automatically after
you roughly adjust it manually.
Select “Bars” to output color bars.
Bars Type
Multi / 75% / 100% / SMPTE
Select the type of color bar to be output when “Bars” is
selected.
Multi: Multiformat color bars are output.
75%: To output 75% color bars
100%: To output 100% color bars
SMPTE: To output SMPTE color bars.
Auto / On / Off
Set the operation of the Flicker-Reduction function.
On: To always activate it
Auto: To automatically activate it when flicker is detected.
Off: To not activate it
Notes
• It is recommended to set this to “Off” when shooting
outdoors or under lighting that does not cause flicker. (It
can be also “Auto,” but the compensation may not be done
properly.)
• It is recommended to set this to “Auto” when shooting
indoors or under various lighting that may cause flicker,
such as fluorescent, sodium, or mercury-vapor lamps. (If
continuously shooting under lighting that may cause flicker,
“Mode” should be set to “On.”)
Frequency
50 Hz / 60 Hz
60 Hz: UC model
50 Hz: Other models
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Camera/Bars
Camera / Bars
Flicker Reduce Mode
Setting Flicker
Compensation
Notes
• This cannot be set while recording and playing, or while the
thumbnail screen is displayed.
• This cannot be set while using Slow & Quick Motion or
Cache Recording mode
• “SLS/EX SLS” cannot be set if the video format is set to the
following settings.
HQ 1280×720/23.98P (UDF HD Mode or exFAT HD
Mode)
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P (exFAT HD Mode)
XAVC-L50 1080/50P (exFAT HD Mode)
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P (exFAT HD Mode)
XAVC-L35 1080/50P (exFAT HD Mode)
SP 1440×1080/23.98P (FAT HD Mode)
Turning the MF
Assist Function
on/off
Color Bars
Set the number of cached frames.
Set to the power supply frequency of the light source causing
flicker.
Setup Menu List
97
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Handle Zoom
Off / Low / High / Vari
Setting the zoom
operation
Zoom Speed
Setting the zoom
speed
Set the zoom operation by using the on-handle ZOOM button.
Off: Zoom does not work.
Low: Zoom works at the speed that is set for “Low” in “Zoom
Speed.”
High: Zoom works at the speed that is set for “High” in
“Zoom Speed.”
Vari: The deeper the on-handle ZOOM button is pressed, the
faster the zoom speed.
High
1 to 99 (70)
Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
handle ZOOM button with the zoom speed switch set to H.
Low
1 to 99 (30)
Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
handle ZOOM button with the zoom speed switch set to L.
Note
Zooming may not operate smoothly if you select a low speed.
Remote
1 to 99 (50)
Set the speed of zooming to be executed when you press the
ZOOM button of the IR Remote Commander.
Note
If the infrared line from the Remote Commander is not
received properly, zooming may not operate smoothly.
Linear / Soft
Zoom
Transition
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
98
Setting the zoom
operation mode
Interval Rec
Setting
On / Off
Setting the Interval
Recording
Interval Time
function
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min
1 to 4/6/12/24 hour
Set the operation mode at the beginning and end of zooming
with the on-handle ZOOM button.
Linear: Zooming immediately begins at the specified speed
when the ZOOM button is pressed and immediately ends
when the button is released.
Soft: Zooming gradually increases the speed up to the
specified speed after the ZOOM button is pressed and
gradually decreases the speed and ends after the button is
released. (1 second at maximum from when the button is
released till the operation ends.)
Turn the Interval Recording function on/off.
Set the interval of recording in Interval Recording.
Number of Frames
1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or
2 / 6 / 12 (When using 1080/
59.94P, 1080/50P, 720/59.94P,
or 720/50P)
Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Interval
Recording.
Pre-Lighting
On / Off
Set whether to turn the video light before starting Interval
Recording while the video light is mounted on the Multi
Interface Shoe. If set to “On”, the video light turns on
automatically approximately 2 seconds before recording.
Setup Menu List
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Frame Rec
Setting
On / Off
Turn the Frame Recording function on/off.
Number of Frames
1 / 3 / 6 / 9 or
2 / 6 / 12 (When using 1080/
59.94P, 1080/50P, 720/59.94P,
or 720/50P)
Set the number of frames to be recorded at a time in Frame
Recording.
Setting the Frame
Recording
function
Clip Cont. Rec Setting
Setting the Clip
Continuous
Recording
function
P.Cache Rec
Turn the Clip Continuous Recording function on/off.
On / Off
Setting
On / Off
Setting the Picture
Cache Recording Rec Time
function
0-2sec / 2-4sec / 4-6sec /
6-8sec / 8-10sec / 10-12sec /
12-14sec / 13-15sec
Turn the Picture Cache Recording function on/off.
Set the time to cache video in the picture cache memory (the
time to a point where recording is to start when you press the
REC START/STOP button in Picture Cache Recording).
Note
When you set “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS
menu to format XAVC-I, “0-2sec” or “2-4sec” can be
selected.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Setup Menu List
99
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
S&Q Motion
Setting
On / Off
Setting the Slow &
Quick Motion
Frame Rate
function
UDF
Unselectable while
1 to 30 (NTSC)
“Format” in
When “Format” is set to
“System” of the
“HD422 50/1080/29.97P,”
OTHERS menu is
“HD422 50/1080/23.98P,”
set to “1920×1080/
“HQ 1920×1080/29.97P,” or
“HQ 1920×1080/23.98P”
59.94P” or
“1920×1080/50P”
1 to 60 (30) (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/720/59.94P,”
“HD422 50/720/29.97P,”
“HD422 50/720/23.98P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/59.94P”
1 to 25 (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/1080/25P” or
“HQ 1920×1080/25P”
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
1 to 50 (25) (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/720/50P,”
“HD422 50/720/25P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/50P”
100
exFAT
1 to 30, 60 (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“XAVC-I 1080/29.97P,”
“XAVC-I 1080/23.98P,”
“XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P,”
“XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P,”
“XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P,” or
“XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P”
Setup Menu List
Turn the Slow and Quick Motion function on/off.
Set the recording frame rate for Slow & Quick Motion mode.
The setting value range varies depending on the selection
region and video format.
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
1 to 30 (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/1080/29.97P,”
“HD422 50/1080/23.98P,”
“HQ 1920×1080/29.97P,” or
“HQ 1920×1080/23.98P”
1 to 60 (30) (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“XAVC-I 720/59.94P,”
“XAVC-L50 720/59.94P,”
“HD422 50/720/59.94P,”
“HD422 50/720/29.97P,”
“HD422 50/720/23.98P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/59.94P”
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
1 to 25, 50 (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“XAVC-I 1080/25P,”
“XAVC-L50 1080/25P,” or
“XAVC-L35 1080/25P”
1 to 25 (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HD422 50/1080/25P” or
“HQ 1920×1080/25P”
1 to 50 (25) (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“XAVC-I 720/50P,”
“XAVC-L50 720/50P,”
“HD422 50/720/50P,”
“HD422 50/720/25P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/50P”
FAT
1 to 30 (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“HQ 1920×1080/29.97P” or
“HQ 1920×1080/23.98P”
1 to 60 (30) (NTSC)
When “Format” is set to
“HQ 1280×720/59.94P,”
“HQ 1280×720/29.97P,” or
“HQ 1280×720/23.98P”
1 to 30 (25) (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HQ 1920×1080/25P”
1 to 60 (25) (PAL)
When “Format” is set to
“HQ 1280×720/50P” or
“HQ 1280×720/25P”
Simul Rec
Simul / Off
Set whether to perform simultaneous recording in the A slot
& B slot.
On / Off
Turns the proxy recording on an SD card on/off.
Setting for two slot
simultaneous
recording
Proxy
Setting for proxy
recording
Setup Menu List
101
CAMERA SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Rec Review
3 sec / 10 sec / Clip
Setting the
playback time for
Rec-Review
TLCS
Setting the Total
Level Control
System (auto
adjustment system
of gain, exposure
and shutter)
Set the time to play the last recorded clip using the RecReview function.
3 sec: Last 3 seconds
10 sec: Last 10 seconds
Clip: Entire duration of the clip
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Level
+1.0 / +0.5 / ±0 / –0.5 / –1.0
Set the target level (to make brighter or darker) of auto iris
control in TLCS. (This setting also affects the gain control in
AGC mode and shutter-speed control in Auto Shutter mode.)
+1.0: Approx. one stop further open
+0.5: Approx. half a stop further open
±0: Standard
–0.5: Approx. half a stop further closed
–1.0: Approx. one stop further closed
Mode
Backlight / Standard /
Spotlight
Set the auto iris control mode in TLCS.
Backlight: Backlight mode to reduce darkening of the center
subject against lights
Standard: Standard mode
Spotlight: Spotlight mode to reduce blown-out highlights on
the center subject in the spotlight
Speed
–99 to +99 (+50)
Set the tracing speed of TLCS control.
AGC
On / Off
Turn the AGC (Auto Gain Control) function on/off.
AGC Limit
3 / 6 / 9 / 12 / 18 dB
Set the maximum gain in AGC.
AGC Point
F2.8 / F4 / F5.6
Set the iris point for switching to auto-iris and AGC (Auto
Gain Control) control when AGC is on.
Auto Shutter
On / Off
Turn the Auto Shutter control function on/off.
A.SHT Limit
1/100
1/150
1/200
1/250
Set the maximum shutter speed in Auto Shutter control.
A.SHT Point
F5.6 / F8 / F11 / F16
Set the exposure position for switching auto iris and auto
shutter control when Auto Shutter is on.
Shockless
White
Off / 1 / 2 / 3
Select the speed of change in white balance when the white
balance mode is switched. Set to “Off” to instantly change the
white balance.
Select a larger number to change the white balance more
slowly through interpolation.
ATW / MEM
Select the white balance adjustment mode selected at the B
position of the WHITE BAL switch.
1/2/3/4/5
Set the tracing speed of ATW. The larger the number you set,
the speed becomes faster.
Setting the
shockless white
balance
White Switch
<B>
Setting for the
WHITE BAL
switch
ATW Speed
Setting for Auto
Tracing White
Balance
102
Setup Menu List
CAMERA SET
Menu items
ATW Mode
Subitems and setting values Contents
Natural / Pure
Natural: Depending on the brightness of scenes, automatically
adjusts the white balance to natural ambience.
Pure: Not leaving the blue color or red color, automatically
adjusts the white balance closer to original colors.
Normal / H INV / V INV /
H+V
Normal: Normal image direction
H INV: To horizontally invert the image
V INV: To vertically invert the image
H+V: To horizontally and vertically invert the image
ATW mode setting
Image
Inversion
Setting the image
inversion function
Notes
• This cannot be set while recording, while the color bars are
displayed or while using Recording Review.
• This cannot be set while the automatic black balance
function is set.
Auto Black
Bal.
Execute / Cancel
Notes
Setting the
automatic black
balance
• This cannot be set while recording or while the color bars
are displayed.
• This cannot be set while using the Picture Cache Recording
mode, the Interval Recording mode, the Frame Recording
mode, the Slow and Quick Motion mode, the Slow Shutter
mode or the Supersensitized Slow Shutter mode.
Execute / Cancel
Automatic
adjustment for the
flange focal length
Video Light
Set
Settings for the
video light
compatible with
the Multi Interface
Shoe.
Executes the automatic flange focal length adjustment by
selecting “Execute.”
Notes
• Execute this function when the video format is set to 59.94i
or 50i.
• Execute this function after setting the ND filter to CLEAR.
“Auto FB Adjust” cannot be selected when the ND filter is
set to 1 or 2. For details, see the steps of the automatic
adjustment for the flange focal length (page 45).
Power Link / Rec Link /
Rec Link + Stby
Sets the lighting method of the video light that is attached to
the Multi Interface Shoe.
Power Link: The video light is turned on/off by interlocking
with the power on/off operation of the camcorder.
Rec Link: The video light is turned on/off by interlocking
with the recording start/stop operation of the camcorder.
Rec Link + Stby: The video light is turned on/off (standby
status) by interlocking with the recording start/stop operation
of the camcorder.
Setup Menu List
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Auto FB
Adjust
Turn the automatic black balance function on/off.
103
AUDIO SET Menu
AUDIO SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Audio Input
CH1 EXT Input
XLR /SHOE MIC
Select the audio signal source from the XLR input connector
and the Multi Interface Shoe to record to CH1.
CH2 EXT Input
XLR /SHOE MIC
Select the audio signal source from the XLR input connector
and the Multi Interface Shoe to record to CH2.
CH3 Input Source
Internal / External
Set the audio signal source to be recorded for CH3 for a 4channel recordable format.
Internal: Record the L side of the internal microphone for
CH3.
External: Record the AUDIO IN CH1 signal for CH3.
CH4 Input Source
Internal / External
Set the audio signal source to be recorded for CH4 for a 4channel recordable format.
Internal: Record the R side of the internal microphone for
CH4.
External: Record the AUDIO IN CH2 signal for CH4.
EXT MIC CH1 Ref
–70 dB / –60 dB / –50 dB /
–40 dB / –30 dB
Select the reference input level for when an external
microphone is connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 connector
and that signal is being used for the audio signal source for
CH1 or CH3. This can be selected regardless of the setting of
the AUDIO SELECT switch.
Setting for audio
inputs
[M]
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Note
This is unavailable when the AUDIO IN CH-1 switch is set to
INT and “CH3 Input Source” is set to “Internal.” This is also
unavailable when the CH-1 input (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V)
switch is set to LINE.
EXT MIC CH2 Ref
–70 dB / –60 dB / –50 dB /
–40 dB / –30 dB
Select the reference input level for when an external
microphone is connected to the AUDIO IN CH-2 connector
and that signal is being used for the audio signal source for
CH2 or CH4. This can be selected regardless of the setting of
the AUDIO SELECT switch.
Note
This is unavailable when the AUDIO IN CH-2 switch is set to
INT and “CH4 Input Source” is set to “Internal.” This is also
unavailable when the CH-2 input (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V)
switch is set to LINE.
INT MIC Level
Select the internal microphone level. This can be selected
–12 dB / –6 dB / 0 dB / +6 dB / regardless of the AUDIO SELECT switch setting.
+12 dB
104
Line Input Ref
+4dB / 0dB / –3dB / EBUL
Select the reference input level for when the AUDIO IN CH1/CH-2 connectors are set to LINE.
Reference Level
–20dB / –18dB / –16dB /
–12dB / EBUL
Select the 1kHz test signal output level.
Limiter Mode
Off / –6 dB / –9 dB / –12 dB /
–15 dB / –17 dB
Select whether to activate the limiter when a loud signal is
input while the AUDIO SELECT switch is set to MANU
(manual).
Setup Menu List
AUDIO SET
Menu items
Setting for audio
outputs
AGC Spec
–6 dB / –9 dB / –12 dB /
–15 dB / –17 dB
Select the audio input level AGC.
CH1&2 AGC Mode
Mono / Stereo
Select auto tuning for the input level of an analog audio signal
recorded to CH-1/CH-2.
Mono: Perform for each channel.
Stereo: Perform in stereo mode.
CH3&4 AGC Mode
Mono / Stereo / Off
Select auto tuning for the input level of an analog audio signal
recorded to CH-3 or CH-4.
Mono: Perform for each channel.
Stereo: Perform in stereo mode.
Off: Do not perform auto tuning. The Limiter Mode setting is
applied.
1KHz Tone
On / Off
Turn the 1-kHz reference tone signal on/off.
Wind Filter CH-1
On / Off
Turn the wind filter for CH1 on/off.
Wind Filter CH-2
On / Off
Turn the wind filter for CH2 on/off.
Wind Filter CH-3
On / Off
Turn the wind filter for CH3 on/off.
Wind Filter CH-4
On / Off
Turn the wind filter for CH4 on/off.
EXT CH Select
CH-1
CH-1/CH-2
CH-1: To record the CH1 external input signal to both CH-1
and CH2 (when the CH-2 AUDIO IN switch is set to
EXT). If “CH4 Input Source” is set to “External,” you can
also record to CH4.
CH-1/CH-2: To record each external input signal to its
respective channel.
Monitor CH
CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4)
CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4)
CH-1 (CH-3)
CH-2 (CH-4)
Select the audio channel(s) to be fed to the headphones and
the built-in speaker.
CH-1/CH-2 (CH-3/CH-4): Stereo
CH-1+CH-2 (CH-3+CH-4): Mix
CH-1 (CH-3): CH-1 (CH-3) only
CH-2 (CH-4): CH-2 (CH-4) only
( ): with Output CH set to “CH-3/CH-4”
Output CH
CH-1/CH-2
CH-3/CH-4
Select audio output channels from either channels 1 and 2 or
channels 3 and 4.
Alarm Level
0 to 7 (4)
Set the alarm sound volume.
Beep
On / Off
Select whether or not to sound a beep upon each operation.
Setup Menu List
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Audio Output
Subitems and setting values Contents
105
VIDEO SET Menu
VIDEO SET
Menu items
Setting values
Contents
Input Source
Select
Camera / i.LINK
Select video and audio signal for the input source.
Camera: Camera image
i.LINK: HDV/DVCAM input via the i.LINK (HDV/DV)
connector
Setting the input
source
Notes
• “i.LINK” is unavailable for UDF or exFAT.
• “i.LINK” is unavailable when “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to
“Network&Prxoy.”
SDI/HDMI/
i.LINK I/O
Select
Selecting input/
output signals for
the connectors
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
106
When using exFAT HD Mode
3G SDI & HD HDMI
HD SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
SD HDMI P
Off
When using UDF HD Mode
HD SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
SD HDMI P
Off
When using FAT HD Mode (HQ)
HD SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
SD HDMI i & DVCAM
SD HDMI P
Off
When using FAT HD Mode (SP)
HD SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
HD HDMI & HDV
SD HDMI i & HDV
SD HDMI P & HDV
SD HDMI i & DVCAM
Off
When using exFAT SD Mode or
UDF SD Mode
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
Off
When using FAT SD Mode
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
SD HDMI i & DVCAM
Off
Setup Menu List
3G SDI & HD HDMI: To output 3G SDI signals from the
SDI OUT connector, and HD HDMI signals from the
HDMI OUT connector.
HD SDI & HD HDMI: To output HD SDI signals from the
SDI OUT connector, and HD HDMI signals from the
HDMI OUT connector.
SD SDI & SD HDMI i: To output SD SDI signals from the
SDI OUT connector, and SD HDMI interlace signals from
the HDMI OUT connector.
HD HDMI & HDV: To output HD HDMI signals from the
HDMI OUT connector, and input/output HDV streams
from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
SD HDMI i & HDV: To output SD HDMI interlace signals
from the HDMI OUT connector, and input/output HDV
streams from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
SD HDMI P & HDV: To output SD HDMI progressive
signals from the HDMI OUT connector, and input/output
HDV streams from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
SD HDMI i & DVCAM: To output SD HDMI interlace
signals from the HDMI OUT connector, and input/output
DVCAM streams from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
SD HDMI P: To output SD HDMI progressive signals from
the HDMI OUT connector.
Off: There is no output from the SDI OUT/HDMI OUT/
i.LINK connectors.
Notes
• Signals are not output from the SDI OUT connector when
this is set to other than an HD SDI or SD SDI setting.
• Slow & Quick Motion mode cannot be used when this is
set to input/output DVCAM streams.
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy,”
signals are not output from the HDMI OUT, VIDEO OUT,
and A/V OUT connector, and signals are not input/output
from the i.LINK connector.
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy,”
“SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” is set to the following
setting automatically and cannot be selected.
—For exFAT HD, UDF HD, FAT HD: “HD SDI & HD
HDMI”
—For exFAT SD, UDF SD, FAT SD: “SD SDI & SD
HDMI i”
VIDEO SET
Menu items
3G SDI OUT
Level A/B
Setting values
LevelA / LevelB
Setting the method
of the 3G SDI
output signals
SDI/HDMI/
Video Out
Super
Memo
On / Off
Notes
Squeeze / Letterbox / Edge
Crop
Set the output mode (aspect) for SD signals
Squeeze: To horizontally reduce a 16:9 picture to output a 4:3
picture
Letterbox: To mask the upper and lower areas of a 4:3 picture
to display a 16:9 picture in the center of the screen
Edge Crop: To cut the both sides of a 16:9 picture to output a
4:3 picture
59.94i (2-3 Pull Down)/
23.98PsF
Select the video output format when the video format is the
following setting.
• For UDF HD Mode:
HD422 50/1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
• For exFAT HD Mode:
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
• For FAT HD Mode:
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Selecting Output
mode
Set whether to add the menus and status indications of the
LCD monitor/EVF screen to the output of the SDI OUT,
HDMI OUT, VIDEO OUT, and A/V OUT connectors.
• This setting for each output is not available when “Format”
in “System” is set to 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P and “SDI/
HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” is set to “3G SDI&HD HDMI.”
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy,”
“SDI/HDMI/Video Out Super” is set to “Off” automatically
and cannot be selected. The menus and status indications of
the LCD monitor/EVF screen are not added.
• On the thumbnail, EXPAND CLIP, and SHOT MARK
screens, the menus and status indications on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen are displayed regardless of the setting
of this item.
Selecting the
operation mode of
the down converter
23.98P Output
Select the data mapping method for the 3G SDI output
signals.
This setting is available when “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
Select” is set to “3G SDI & HD HDMI.”
Setting the
character
information for
each output
Down
Converter
Contents
Note
When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy,” the
video output format is set to 23.98PsF automatically for the
above format settings.
SDI Rec
Control
Setting the SDI
recording control
Off / HD SDI Remote I/F
To turn the function to enabling recording synchronized with
this camcorder.
HD SDI Remote I/F: To feed a REC trigger signal to a
recorder connected to the SDI OUT connector.
Setup Menu List
107
VIDEO SET
Menu items
Setting values
Match Clip
Name
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
108
Setup Menu List
On / Off
Contents
Set whether to add the clip name information to the SDI
output.
LCD/VF SET Menu
LCD/VF SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
LCD
Color
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjusting the LCD
monitor
Contrast
Adjust the color of pictures on the LCD monitor.
Adjust the contrast of pictures on the LCD monitor.
–99 to +99 (±0)
EVF
Setting the
viewfinder
Adjust the brightness of pictures on the LCD monitor.
Backlight
High / Low
Select the brightness of the EVF backlight.
Mode
Color / B&W
Select the display mode of the EVF while recording (or
standing by to record).
Color: Color mode
B&W: Monochrome mode
Contrast
–99 to +99 (±0)
Adjust the contrast of pictures on the EVF screen.
Brightness
–99 to +99 (+30)
Adjust the brightness of pictures on the EVF screen.
Power
Auto / On
Set the condition to turn the EVF on.
Auto: To turn it on when the LCD monitor is closed or rotated
to the upside-down position.
On: To keep it on regardless of the status of the LCD monitor.
Note
When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy,” this
setting is set to “Auto” automatically and cannot be selected.
This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the LCD
monitor is rotated to the upside-down position.
Peaking
Setting
On / Off
Setting the peaking
function for the
Color
LCD monitor/EVF
White / Red / Yellow / Blue
[M]
Level
High / Mid / Low
Turn the peaking function on/off.
Select the color of the peaking signal.
Set the level of the peaking signal.
Setup Menu List
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Brightness
–99 to +99 (±0)
109
LCD/VF SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Marker
Setting
On / Off
Setting the
markers added to Safety Zone
pictures on the
On / Off
LCD monitor/EVF
Safety Area
screen
80% / 90% / 92.5% / 95%
[M]
Turn all marker indications on/off in combination.
Turn the safety zone marker on/off.
Select the size (ratio to the entire screen) of the safety zone
marker.
Center Marker
On / Off
Turn the center marker on/off.
Aspect Marker
Line / Mask / Off
Select the aspect marker.
Line: To show white lines
Mask: To lower the video signal level of areas outside the
marker range.
Off: To not display
Note
No aspect marker is displayed when a video format of EC
(Edge Crop) is selected in SD Mode.
Aspect Select
Select the ratio of the aspect marker.
4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 1.66:1 /
1.85:1 / 2.35:1 / 2.4:1
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
110
Aspect Mask
When “Aspect Marker” is “Mask,” select the brightness of
90% / 80% / 70% / 60% / 50% / images outside the aspect marker.
40% / 30% / 20% / 10% / 0%
Zebra
Setting the zebra
pattern
[M]
Guide Frame
On / Off
Turn the guide frame marker on/off.
Setting
On / Off
Turn the zebra function on/off.
Zebra Select
1 / 2 / Both
Select the zebra pattern(s) to be displayed.
1: To display only Zebra1 (the default is 70%) for an area
within ±10% of the “Zebra1 Level” video level.
2: To display only Zebra2 (the default is 100%) for a video
level over 100%.
Both: To display both zebra 1 and zebra 2
Zebra1 Level
50 to 107 (70)
Set the display level of zebra 1.
Display On/Off Video Level Warnings
Turn the warning indication to be displayed when the picture
is too bright or too dark on/off.
On / Off
Selecting the items
to be displayed on Sending Clip Info
the LCD monitor/
On / Off
EVF screen
Brightness Display
[M]
On / Off
Turn the numeric indication to show the picture brightness on/
off.
Histogram Display
On / Off
Turn the histogram indication to show the level distribution of
the picture on/off.
Lens Info
Meter / Feet / Off
Select the depth-of-field indication.
Meter: To indicate in meters
Feet: To indicate in feet
Off: To not indicate
Zoom Position
Number / Bar / Off
Select the type of zoom position indication.
Number: Indication with a number
Bar: Indication with a bar
Off: To not display
Setup Menu List
Display the uploading status of a clip while connected with
the wireless LAN.
LCD/VF SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Turn the audio level meter indication on/off.
Timecode
On / Off
Turn the time data (timecode, user bits, duration) indication
on/off.
Battery Remain
On / Off
Turn the battery remaining/DC input voltage indication on/
off.
Media Remain
On / Off
Turn the media remaining indication on/off.
TLCS Mode
On / Off
Turn the TLCS mode indication on/off.
Steady Shot
On / Off
Turn the Steady Shot indication on/off.
Focus Mode
On / Off
Turn the focus operation mode indication on/off.
White Balance Mode
On / Off
Turn the white balance mode indication on/off.
Picture Profile
On / Off
Turn the Picture Profile indication on/off.
Filter Position
On / Off
Turn the ND filter setting indication on/off.
Iris Position
On / Off
Turn the iris setting indication on/off.
Gain Setting
On / Off
Turn the gain setting indication on/off.
Shutter Setting
On / Off
Turn the shutter mode and speed indication on/off.
Rec Mode
On / Off
Turn the special recording mode (Frame Rec, Interval Rec,
S&Q Motion, Simul Rec) indication on/off.
Video Format
On / Off
Turn the video format indication on/off.
Clip Name
On / Off
Turn the clip name display on/off.
ClipNumber (PB)
On / Off
Turn the clip number display on/off.
SDI Rec Control
On / Off
Turn the synchronous recording display (the Rec2/Rec2-P
display) on/off.
When “HD SDI Remote I/F” is selected: “Rec2” is displayed.
When “Proxy” is set to “On”: “Rec2-P” is displayed.
Wide Conversion
On / Off
Turn the wide Conversion setting indication on/off.
Network Status
On / Off
Turn the network connection status indication on/off when the
network is connected.
Streaming Status
On / Off
Turn the streaming status indication on/off.
SD Card Remain
On / Off
Turn the remaining time indication for the SD card in the
camcorder on/off.
GPS
On / Off
Turn the positioning status indication on/off.
Setup Menu List
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Audio Level Meter
On / Off
111
TC/UB SET Menu
TC/UB SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Timecode
Mode
Preset / Regen / Clock
Setting the
timecode
Set the timecode mode.
Preset: To start the timecode from the specified value
Regen (regeneration): To continue the timecode during
recording only. When you insert another SxS memory
card, the camcorder starts next recording so that the
timecode continues from the last recorded timecode on the
card.
Clock: To use the current clock time as the timecode
Notes
• In Interval Recording, Frame Recording and Slow & Quick
Motion Recording, if you set “Mode” to “Preset” the
timecode advances in Rec Run mode regardless of the
“Run” setting. If you set it to “Clock,” the timecode
advances in Regen mode.
• When the Picture Cache function (page 42) is active
(“Setting” of “P.Cache Rec” is set to “On”), the timecode
always advances in Free Run mode. When the Picture
Cache Recording function is deactivated, the running mode
is restored to the selected mode.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Run
Rec Run / Free Run
Users Bit
Setting the user
bits
112
Set the running mode when the timecode mode is set to
“Preset.”
Rec Run: To advance the timecode during recording only. The
continuity of the timecode is maintained between clips in
the sequence of recording as long as the SxS memory card
is not changed. If you remove the memory card and record
on another card, the timecode will not continue when you
return the first card to the slot again.
Free Run: The timecode keeps advancing regardless of the
state of recording to the SxS memory card.
Setting
Set the timecode to a desired value.
Reset
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to reset the timecode to 00:00:00:00.
TC Out
Auto / Generator
Select the timecode output.
Auto: To output the timecode generator value during
recording, and the timecode reader value during playback.
Generator: To output the timecode generator value during
recording or playback.
Mode
Fix / Date
Set the user bit mode.
Fix: To use a desired fixed value as the user bits
Date: To use the current date
Setting
Set the user bits to a desired value.
Setup Menu List
TC/UB SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
TC Format
DF / NDF
Set the timecode format.
DF: Drop frame
NDF: Non drop frame
Setting the time
code format
Note
The current video format/frame frequency determines
whether the mode is fixed either to DF or NDF (see below),
regardless of the TC Format setting.
Frame
setting
TC Format
59.94i
59.94P
29.97P
23.98P 1)
SP 1440×1080/
23.98P (FAT)
HQ 1280×720/
23.98P (UDF)
23.98P
XAVC-I 1080/
23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/
23.98P
XAVC-L35 1080/
23.98P
HD422 50/1080/
23.98P
HD422 50/720/
23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/
23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/
23.98P
HQ 1280×720/
23.98P (FAT)
50i
50P
25P
00 to 29
DF/NDF
switchable
(Fixed to DF in
Clock mode)
00 to 23 2) Fixed to NDF 3)
00 to 24
1) With DF, the frame digits can be set as desired in the range
of 00 to 29.
With NDF, the frame at the beginning of recording is
limited to 00, 05, 10, 15, 20, or 25.
2) The frame digits in “Setting” is limited to 00, 04, 08, 12, 16,
and 20.
The frame at the beginning of recording is limited to 00, 04,
08, 12, 16, or 20.
As “23.98P Output” (page 107) of the VIDEO SET menu
becomes 2-3 pull-down 59.94i when recording (or standing
by to record) HQ 1920×1080/23.98P other than when
“23.98PsF” is selected, the overlapping timecodes of frames
output from the SDI OUT connector are renumbered from
00 to 29.
3) Even in Clock mode, the timecode is gradually shifted,
because it is counted by NDF.
As output from the SDI OUT connector becomes 2-3
pulled-down video when recording (or standing by to
record) HQ 1920×1080/23.98P and other than “23.98PsF”
is selected for “23.98P Output” (page 107) of the VIDEO
SET menu, fields are created in which overlapping
timecodes are displayed on the screen.
Fixed to NDF
Setup Menu List
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Video formats
113
NETWORK SET Menu
NETWORK
SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
NW&Proxy/
USB
Network&Proxy / USB A / Off
Setting for the
network
connection and
external device
connection
Network Mode Access Point / Station /Modem /
Setting for the
network
connection mode
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
114
Wired LAN / Off
Activate/deactivate the network connection and external
device connector.
Network&Proxy: Activates the network connection and proxy
connection.
USB A: Activates the external device connector.
Off: Deactivates the network connection and external device
connection.
Sets the operation mode for the network connection.
Access Point/Station: Connects via wireless LAN. You can
select when the supplied IFU-WLM3 USB wireless LAN
module is attached to the external device connector.
Modem: Connects via 3G/4G/LTE. Set when an optional
modem is attached to the external device connector.
Wired LAN: Connects via wired LAN. Set when an optional
USB-RJ45 adaptor is attached to the external device
connector.
Off: Deactivates the network connection.
Proxy recording is available.
For about the functions for each mode, see “List of
functions for network connections”(page 66).
Streaming
Setting streaming
Note
Setting
On / Off
Starts or stops streaming.
Preset Select
Preset1 / Preset2 / Preset3
Selects the preset for starting streaming.
When “Network
Mode” is set to
“Off,” this cannot
be set.
Setup Menu List
NETWORK
SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Streaming Edit Preset Edit
Setting the
streaming edit
Note
Preset1 / Preset2 / Preset3
Type
MPEG2-TS/UDP / MPEG2TS/RTP
When “Network
Size
Mode” is set to
HD/SD Auto / 1280x720 /
“Off,” this cannot
640x360 / 480x270
be set.
Bit Rate
9Mbps / 6Mbps / 3Mbps /
2Mbps / 1Mbps / 0.5Mbps
Selects the preset for editing the connection settings for
streaming.
Select the video type for streaming.
Set the size for streaming video.
Set the bit rate for streaming.
Note
When “Bit Rate” for the Proxy recording format is set to
“9Mbps,”
• “Bit Rate” for the streaming setting cannot be set to
“6Mbps” or more.
• If you select a preset with “Bit Rate” for the streaming
setting set to “6Mbps” or more, “Bit Rate” for streaming
automatically changes to “3Mbps.”
Setting the proxy
recording
Wi-Fi Remote
Enter a destination address for streaming.
Dest. Port
00001-65535 (01234)
Enter the port number of the destination server for streaming.
Set
Execute / Cancel
Activates the streaming setting for the selected Preset1-3
(select Execute).
Size
1280×720
640×360
480×270
480×270
Selects the size for the Proxy recording format.
Bit Rate
9Mbps
3Mbps
1Mbps
0.5Mbps
Selecting the bit rate for the proxy recording
Format SD Card
Execute / Cancel
Executes formatting of an SD card.
On / Off
Select “On” when using the Wi-Fi remote commander.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Proxy File
Dest. Address
Note
When “Network Mode” is set to “Modem,” this cannot be set.
NFC
Execute / Cancel
Starts the easy connection by the NFC function.
Note
When “Network Mode” is set to “Modem/Wired LAN,” this
cannot be set.
WPS
Execute / Cancel
Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS).
Note
When “Network Mode” is set to “Modem/Wired LAN,” this
cannot be set.
SSID&Key
Displays the SSID and key (password).
Setup Menu List
115
NETWORK
SET
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Regenerate
Key
Execute / Cancel
Regenerates the key (password).
Note
When “Network Mode” is set to “Station/Modem/Wired
LAN,” this cannot be set.
Channel
Auto / CH1 to CH13
Sets the channel for wireless LAN.
Note
When “Network Mode” is set to “Modem/Wired LAN,” this
cannot be set.
IP Address
Displays the IP address of the camcorder.
Wired LAN Set DHCP
Set DHCP settings.
When set to “On,” an IP address is automatically assigned to
the camcorder.
When you manually input an IP address into the camcorder,
set to “Off.”
On / Off
Setting wired LAN
connection
Set when
“Network Mode”
is set to “Wired
IP Address
LAN.”
(DHCP/On: Automatic
acquisition
DHCP/Off: 192.168.2.50)
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
User Name
Enter the IP address of the camcorder.
When “DHCP” is set to “Off,” this is available.
Subnet Mask
(DHCP/On: Automatic
acquisition
DHCP/Off: 255.255.255.0)
Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder.
When “DHCP” is set to “Off,” this is available.
Gateway
(DHCP/On: Automatic
acquisition
DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Enter the gateway for the access point.
When “DHCP” is set to “Off,” this is available.
DNS Auto
On / Off
Set DNS automatic acquisition settings.
When set to “On,” the DNS server address is automatically
acquired.
1st DNS Server
(DHCP/On: Automatic
acquisition
DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Enter the primary DNS server for the router.
When “DNS Auto” is set to “Off,” this is available.
2nd DNS Server
(DHCP/On: Automatic
acquisition
DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0)
Enter the secondary DNS server for the router.
When “DNS Auto” is set to “Off,” this is available.
Set
Execute/Cancel
Activates the setting for the Wired LAN connection (select
Execute).
(admin)
Sets a desired user name in 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Note
When “Network Mode” is set to “Modem,” this cannot be set.
Password
(pxw-x200)
Sets a password in 0 to 31 alphanumeric characters.
Notes
• Each password character is displayed as “ * .”
• When “Network Mode” is set to “Modem,” this cannot be
set.
116
Setup Menu List
NETWORK
SET
Menu items
Network Reset
Subitems and setting values Contents
Execute/Cancel
Resetting the
network settings to
the factory status
Memo
This setting is available when “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to
“Network&Prxoy.”
Wi-Fi Version
Wi-Fi Version
Up
Resets the network settings to the factory status.
Displays the version for the network connecting function of
the camcorder.
Execute / Cancel
Upgrades the version for the network connecting function of
the camcorder.
Notes
• Do not turn the camcorder off while updating.
• This item cannot be selected when an SD card is not
inserted.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Setup Menu List
117
OTHERS Menu
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
All Reset
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to reset the camcorder to the factory status.
Resetting to the
factory status
Camera Data
Storing/recalling
the menu settings
to an SxS memory
card or USB flash
drive
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Store
Execute/Cancel
When you select “Execute” to store the setting values to an
SxS memory card, the setup file is stored to one of the
following directories.
For UDF: /General/Sony/PRO/CAMERA/XDCAM/
PXW_X200/
For exFAT: /XDROOT/General/Sony/PRO/CAMERA/
XDCAM/PXW_X200/
For FAT: /SONY/PRO/CAMERA/XDCAM_EX/
PXW_X200/
Recall
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to retrieve the setting values from an SxS
memory card.
All Save (USB)
Execute/Cancel
When you select “Execute” to store the setting values to a
USB flash drive, the setup file is stored to the following
directory.
/MSSONY/SONY/PRO/CAMERA/XDCAM/PXW_X200/
All Load (USB)
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to retrieve the setting values from a USB
flash drive.
Time Zone
UTC –12:00 to +13:30
Setting the time
difference
Set the time-zone difference from UTC in steps of 30
minutes.
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: –5:00
Europe area: 0:00
Oceania: +10:00
Clock Set
Date/Time
Setting the built-in 12H/24H
clock
12H / 24H
Date Mode
YYMMDD / MMDDYY /
DDMMYY
Language
Selecting the
language for
menus and
messages
English / Chinese / Spanish /
Portuguese / Russian /
Indonesian
Set the current time and date.
Select the display mode of time.
12H: 12-hour mode
24H: 24-hour mode
Select the display mode of the date.
YYMMDD: In sequence of year, month, day
MMDDYY: In sequence of month, day, year
DDMMYY: In sequence of day, month, year
English: To display in English
Chinese: To display in Chinese
Spanish: To display in Spanish
Portuguese: To display in Portuguese
Russian: To display in Russian
Indonesian: To display in Indonesian
Note
Language for menus and messages differ depending on
countries and regions.
118
Setup Menu List
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Assign Button <1> to <5>
Assigning
functions to the
assignable buttons
Off / Zebra / Peaking / Marker /
Last Clip DEL / ATW / ATW
Hold / Rec Review / Rec /
Picture Cache / Freeze Mix /
Focus Magnifier / Spotlight /
Backlight / IR Remote / Shot
Mark1 / Shot Mark2 / VF Mode
/ BRT Disp / Histogram / Lens
Info / OK Mark / Clip Flag OK /
Clip Flag NG / Clip Flag Keep /
Clip Continuous Rec / LCD/VF
Adjust / Color Bars / One Push
Auto Iris / Handle Zoom / NFC
/ Streaming
<1> Zebra
<2> Peaking
<3> Off
<4> Off
<5> Off
Setup Menu List
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Assign a function to the ASSIGN buttons 1/2/3/4/5. (The
selectable functions are shared.)
Off: No function
Zebra: For turning the zebra function on/off
Peaking: For turning the peaking function on/off
Marker: For turning the safety zone, center marker, aspect
marker and guide frame functions on/off as a group
Last Clip DEL: For executing the last clip delete (retake)
function
ATW: For turning the ATW function on/off
ATW Hold: For turning the ATW hold function on/off
Rec Review: For executing the recording review function
Rec: For starting/stopping recording
Picture Cache: For turning the Picture Cache Recording
function on/off
Freeze Mix: For executing the freeze mix function
Focus Magnifier: For turning the expanded focus function on/
off
Spotlight: For enabling and disabling TLCS Spotlight mode
Backlight: For enabling and disabling TLCS Backlight mode
IR Remote: For activating/deactivating the IR Remote
Commander
Shot Mark1: For adding shot mark 1 (HD Mode only)
Shot Mark2: For adding shot mark 2 (HD Mode only)
VF Mode: For switching between color and monochrome for
the EVF screen
BRT Disp: For turning the brightness level indication function
on/off
Histogram: For turning the histogram indication function on/
off
Lens Info: For switching the depth-of-field indication to
“Off”/“Meter”/“Feet”
OK Mark: For adding or removing an OK mark (HD Mode
only, not valid via the thumbnail screen)
Clip Flag OK: For enabling and disabling OK flags for clips
during recording and playback (UDF only)
Clip Flag NG: For enabling and disabling NG flags for clips
during recording and playback (UDF only)
Clip Flag Keep: For enabling and disabling Keep flags for
clips during recording and playback (UDF only)
Clip Continuous Rec: For turning the Clip Continuous
Recording function on/off
LCD/VF Adjust: For switching the LCD/VF Adjust function
level bar indication (LCD brightness adjustment t LCD
contrast adjustment t VF brightness adjustment t VF
contrast adjustment t off)
Color Bars: For switching between the color bar and camera
signal
One Push Auto Iris: For executing the One Push iris function.
Handle Zoom: For switching the handle zoom operation.
NFC: For executing the NFC function.
Streaming: For starting or stopping streaming.
119
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Tally
Front
High / Low / Off
Setting the tally
lamps
Hours Meter
Hours (Sys)
The non-resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.
Displaying the
hours meter
Hours (Reset)
The resettable accumulated time of use is displayed.
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to reset the Hours (Reset) value to 0.
IR Remote
On / Off
Activating/
deactivating the
Remote
Commander
Battery Alarm
Setting the low
power alarm
Set to “On” to activate remote control operations from the
supplied IR Remote Commander.
Note
The setting automatically returns to “Off” when the
camcorder is turned off.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Low BATT
5% / 10% / 15% / ... / 45% /
50%
Set the battery level at which the Low BATT warning is
generated (in steps of 5%).
BATT Empty
3% to 7% (3%)
Set the battery level at which the BATT Empty warning is
generated.
DC Low Volt1
11.5 V to 17.0 V (11.5 V)
Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt1 warning is
generated.
DC Low Volt2
11.0 V to 14.0 V (11.0 V)
Set the DC IN voltage at which the DC Low Volt2 warning is
generated.
Battery INFO
Type
The type (product name) is displayed.
Showing
information
regarding the
battery pack
(display only)
MFG Date
The date of manufacture is displayed.
Charge Count
The accumulated number of times of charge/discharge is
displayed.
Capacity
The estimated total capacity of full charge is displayed.
Genlock
Setting Genlock
operation
Voltage
The current output voltage is displayed.
Remaining
The current remaining level is displayed.
H Phase (HD)
–999 to +999 (±0)
Set the H phase (phase of the horizontal sync signal) of HD
signal for Genlock operation.
H Phase (SD)
–99 to +99 (±0)
Set the H phase (phase of the horizontal sync signal) of SD
signal for Genlock operation.
Direct Menu
All / Part / Off
All: All Direct menu operations are permitted. (GAIN,
SHUTTER, and WHITE BAL switch operations are
disabled.)
Part: A part of Direct menu operations is permitted. The
operation is limited depending on the GAIN, SHUTTER,
or WHITE BAL switch setting.
Off: No Direct menu operation is permitted.
Internal / Both / External
Internal: To activate recording start/stop operations only for
an SxS memory card in a built-in slot.
Both: To activate recording start/stop operations both for an
SxS memory card in a built-in slot and the external
recording device connected via the i.LINK connector.
External: To activate recording start/stop operations only for
the external recording device connected via the i.LINK
connector.
Setting the Direct
menu function
Trigger Mode
Setting for
operating an
external recording
device connected
via the i.LINK
connector (FAT
only)
[M]
120
Set the brightness of the tally lamp.
High: To brighten the lamp
Low: To dim the lamp
Off: To not light the lamp
Setup Menu List
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
System
Country
NTSC Area / NTSC(J) Area /
PAL Area
Select the area of use and setup ON/OFF setting.
NTSC Area: Setup ON
NTSC(J) Area: Setup OFF
PAL Area: Setup OFF
Note
The default setting is different among the sales areas.
United States and Canada: NTSC Area
Other areas: PAL Area
Switch the file system between UDF/exFAT/FAT.
HD/SD
HD / SD
Switch between HD Mode and SD Mode.
XAVC/MPEG2
XAVC / MPEG2
Switch between XAVC and MPEG2 format for exFAT HD
Mode.
Format
Select the video format for recording.
HD Mode
• Bit rate
UDF: HD422 50 or HD420 HQ
exFAT: XAVC, HD422 50, or HD420 HQ
FAT: HQ or SP
• Horizontal resolution
1920, 1440, or 1280
• Frame rate
23.98, 25, 29.97, 50, or 59.94
• Scan system
i (interlace) or P (progressive)
SD Mode
• Frame rate
25, 29.97, 50, or 59.94
• Scan system
i (interlace) or P (progressive)
• Aspect
SQ (Squeeze) or EC (Edge Crop)
For about the video format that can be selected for each
mode, see “Video Format (Format)” (page 138).
Notes
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
F.Sys.
UDF / exFAT / FAT
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy” or
“USB A,” “1920×1080/59.94P” and “1920×1080/50P”
cannot be selected.
• When setting to “1920×1080/59.94P” or “1920×1080/50P,”
signals are not output from the A/V OUT and VIDEO OUT
connectors.
Setup Menu List
121
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Clip
Auto Naming
C**** / Title / Plan
Select the method to specify clip names.
C****: UDF, exFAT
Title: To specify as desired by “Title Prefix”
Plan: To use a name specified in planning metadata (if no
name is specified in planning metadata, the name
specified by “Title Prefix” is used.)
Title Prefix
nnn_ (nnn=least three digits of
the serial number)
(Max. 7 characters displayed)
Call the Character Set screen to set the title part (4 to 46
characters) of the clip names.
Configuration of the Character Set screen
Character selection area (3 lines):
To select a character to insert in the cursor position of the
Title Prefix area.
Setting for clip
name or deletion
!#$%()+,-.;=@[]^_~0123456789
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Cursor operation area (1 line):
Space: To change the character in the cursor position to a
space
INS: To insert a space in the cursor position
DEL: To delete a character in the cursor position
T: To move the cursor to the left
t: To move the cursor to the right
ESC: To cancel the change and exit the Character Set
screen
END: To validate the change and exit the Character Set
screen
Title Prefix area (1 line):
For entering the title
To set the title
1 Using the up/down/left/right buttons, select (highlight) a
character in the character selection area to be entered in the
cursor position of the Title Prefix area. Then press the SEL/
SET button or the jog dial. (The selected character is
entered, and the cursor is moved to the right.)
2 Repeat Step 1 for setting the title. (Use Space, INS, and
DEL as required.)
3 When the title setting is completed, select END to exit the
Character Set screen.
Number Set
0001 to 9999
Set the second 4-numeric part of the clip name.
Set a five-digit number for a planning metadata file.
Update
Media(A) / Media(B)
To update the managerial file on the SxS memory card in the
selected slot.1)
Last Clip DEL
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to delete the last recorded clip.
All Clips DEL
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to delete all clips on the active SxS memory
card.
Note
Clips to which you applied OK mark and clips that are locked
cannot be deleted.
Filter Clips
OK / NG / KP / None
122
Setup Menu List
Select from among OK (the OK flag), NG (the not good flag),
KP (the keep flag), or None (for no flag) to filter displayed
clips. (UDF, exFAT)
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Lock All Clips
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to protect all clips. (UDF, exFAT)
Unlock All Clips
Execute/Cancel
Select “Execute” to remove protection from all clips. (UDF,
exFAT)
Index Picture Pos
0sec to 10sec (0sec)
Set the image for viewing thumbnails. This selects the time
difference from the start of the clip.
Find Mode
Clip / Rec Start
Set the action for when you press the PREV button/NEXT
button. (UDF, exFAT)
Clip: Move to the start of the current clip/next clip. (Pressing
the PREV button from the start of a clip will move to the
start of the previous clip.)
Rec Start: Move to the previous Rec Start Essence Mark/the
next Rec Start Essence Mark.
Copy All 2)
Clips
Setting for
General Files
collective copy of
clips and/or
Clips&General
General files
Format Media
Formatting SxS
memory cards
To copy all clips on an SxS memory card to the other.
To copy all files in the General folder on an SxS memory card
to the other.
To copy all clips and files in the General folder on an SxS
memory card to the other.
Media(A)
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot A
with the selected file system (UDF/exFAT/FAT).
Media(B)
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to format the SxS memory card in slot B
with the selected file system (UDF/exFAT/FAT).
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Setup Menu List
123
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Plan.Metadata Load/Slot(A) or Load/Slot(B)
Execute / Cancel
Setting planning
metadata
To load planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot
A or B.
Selecting “Execute” displays the list of the planning metadata
files stored on the SxS memory card in slot A or B. Specify a
file, select “Load” then “Execute” for loading.
Notes
• The file list displays up to 64 files. Even if the total number
of planning metadata files is 64 or less, all of the planning
metadata files may not appear if the directory where they
are located in the SxS memory card (General/Sony/
Planning) contains 512 or more files.
• After you start loading, do not remove the SxS memory
card until the completion message is displayed.
Loads planning metadata from the USB flash drive connected
to the external device connector.
Select “Execute” to show the list of the planning metadata
files stored in the USB flash drive and select a file to be
loaded.
Properties
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to display the detailed information of the
planning metadata loaded in the camcorder.
File Name: Filename
Assign ID: Assignment ID
Created: Time and date of creation
Modified: Time and date of most recent modification
Modified by: Name of person who modified the file
Title1: Title1 specified in file (clip name in ASCII format)
Title2: Title2 specified in file (clip name in UTF-8 format)
Material Gp: Number of material groups (groups of clips
recorded using the same planning metadata)
Shot Mark1: Name defined for Shot Mark 1
Shot Mark2: Name defined for Shot Mark 2
When you select “File Name,” “Assign ID,” “Title1,” or
“Title2” on the Planning Metadata Properties screen and then
press the SEL/SET button or the jog dial, the selected item is
displayed on the full screen, permitting you to check a long
file or clip name at a glance.
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
Load/USB
(in UDF or exFAT)
Execute / Cancel
Note
Names of shot marks cannot be displayed on the full screen
even if you select Shot Mark1 or Shot Mark2.
Clear
Execute / Cancel
Select “Execute” to clear the planning metadata loaded in the
camcorder.
Clip Name Disp
Select the display mode of the clip name specified in planning
Title1 (ASCII) / Title2 (UTF-8) metadata.
Note
When both an ASCII format name and a UTF-8 format name
are specified in planning metadata, the UTF-8 format string is
used as the clip name. If only either ASCII-format name or
UTF-8 format name is specified in planning metadata, the
specified name is displayed regardless of the menu setting.
GPS
On / Off
Settings for GPS
124
Setup Menu List
Turns the GPS function on/off.
OTHERS
Menu items
Subitems and setting values Contents
Fan Control
Setting
Auto / Off in Rec
Sets the fan control mode.
Auto: Controls the fan automatically in response to changes
in temperature.
Off in Rec: Turn off the fan while recording. (If temperature
is excessively high, the fan is turned on automatically.)
Vx.xx
The current software version of the camcorder is displayed.
Setting the fan
control mode
Version
Showing the
version of this unit
Version Up
Execute / Cancel
Updating this unit
Select “Execute” to update the camcorder.
Use when updating is required.
Note
This item cannot be selected when no SxS memory card has
been loaded.
Menu Scroll
Normal / Loop
Setting the menu
scroll operation
1) If recording/playback cannot be made with an SxS
2) When you copy an SxS memory card including
multiple clips and files to another card with the same
capacity, all the clips and files may not be copied
completely to the end, depending on the usage
conditions or memory properties.
Setup Menu List
Menu Configuration and Detailed Settings
memory card because it has been operated with a
device other than this camcorder, or for some other
reason, updating the managerial file on the card may
improve the situation.
Select the method for menu scrolling.
Normal: The cursor moves and stops at the top or the bottom.
Loop: The cursor continues moving up (jumping from the top
to the bottom) or down (jumping from the bottom to the
top).
125
Connecting External Devices
Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices
To display recording/playback pictures on an
external monitor, select the output signal and use
an appropriate cable for the monitor to be
connected.
Output signal from the camcorder can be
recorded when a recording device is connected.
Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the
same status information and menus can be
displayed on the external monitor as those on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen.
According to the signal fed to the monitor, set
“SDI/HDMI/Video Out Super” (page 107) of the
VIDEO SET menu to “On.”
When outputting SD signals in HD Mode, select
in advance the output mode (Squeeze, Letterbox,
or Edge Crop) with “Down Converter” (page
107) of the VIDEO SET menu.
Note
SD signals down-converted for output have the
following restrictions:
Images of 50P/50i/25P are output as PAL signals, those
of 59.94P/59.94i/29.97P are output as NTSC signals, and
those of 23.98P are output as 2-3 pulled-down NTSC
signals.
Connecting External Devices
SDI OUT connector (BNC type)
The camcorder is compatible with 3G SDI, and
3G output for 59.94P/50P is enabled in exFAT
HD Mode. (When the format is set to a setting
other than 59.94P/50P, HD signals are output
even if “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” is set to
“3G SDI & HD HDMI.”)
The connector is set at the factory to output an HD
SDI signal.
When you set the camcorder to SD Mode, the
connector outputs an SD SDI signal.
Set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page 106)
of the VIDEO SET menu to “SD SDI & SD
HDMI i” to output down-converted SD SDI
signals for monitoring, even in HD Mode. Use a
commercially available 75-ohm coaxial cable for
connection.
To start recording on an external device in
synchronization
With HD SDI signal output selected,
synchronized recording is possible by feeding a
REC trigger signal to an external recording
126
device connected via the SDI OUT connector. To
enable synchronized recording, set “SDI Rec
Control” (page 107) of the VIDEO SET menu to
“HD SDI Remote I/F.”
Notes
• If you set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the
VIDEO SET menu to other than “3G SDI & HD
HDMI,” “HD SDI & HD HDMI,” or “SD SDI & SD
HDMI i” and use the HDMI OUT connector and
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector, no signal will be output
from the SDI OUT connector.
• When a connected external device does not correspond
to a REC trigger signal, the device cannot be operated.
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy,”
“SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” cannot be selected.
HDMI OUT connector (Type A connector)
Signal output from this connector is enabled by
setting “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page
106) of the VIDEO SET menu.
In HD Mode, you can select HD HDMI, SD
HDMI interlace, or SD HDMI Progressive
output.
In SD Mode, only an SD HDMI interlace signal
can be output.
Use a commercially available HDMI cable for
connection.
Note
When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy,”
signals are not output from the HDMI OUT connector.
VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)
By changing the setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/
O Select” (page 106) of the VIDEO SET menu,
you can output HD-Y signals in HD Mode or
down-converted SD analog composite signals for
monitoring in SD Mode.
Use a commercially available BNC cable for
connection.
Note
Signals are not output from the VIDEO OUT connector
during the following settings
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy”
or “USB A.”
• When “Format” in “System” is set to 1920×1080/
59.94P, 50P.
Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector (IEEE1394, 4pin)
Input/output of an HDV or DVCAM stream can
be enabled by changing “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O
Select” (page 106) of the VIDEO SET menu.
To set the input, select “i.LINK” in “Input Source
Select” (page 106) of the VIDEO SET menu.
A monitor or VTR that supports i.LINK can be
connected.
For details on i.LINK connection, see “Connecting
via i.LINK (FAT only)” (page 129).
Notes
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy,”
signals are not input/output from the i.LINK
connector.
• When “F.Sys” in “System” is set to “UDF” and
“exFAT” mode, signals are not input/output from the
i.LINK connector.
A/V OUT connector (audio/video
composite multiconnector)
By changing the setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK
I/O Select” (page 106) of the VIDEO SET menu,
you can output 2-channel audio and downconverted SD analog composite signals for
monitoring.
Use the supplied AV connection cable for
connection.
To use the ExpressCard slot of a
computer
If the computer is equipped with an ExpressCard/
34 or ExpressCard/54 slot, you can directly insert
the SxS memory card containing clips recorded
with this camcorder and access to the files.
Notes
• The SxS Device Driver Software and the UDF Driver
Software must be downloaded and installed on your
computer. For details, see “Software Downloads”
(page 174).
• Operation is not guaranteed with all computers.
• Before editing, set the SxS memory card to the read
only status and make a backup of the data to the
computer.
For support information for the driver, visit the
following URL:
http://www.sony.net/SxS-Support/
With a Windows computer, check that a
Removable Disk appears in My Computer. This
indicates normal status.
With a Macintosh computer, an icon is displayed
on the menu bar.
To connect with a USB cable
When you connect the camcorder to the computer
using the supplied USB cable, the memory card in
the slot is acknowledged as an extended drive by
the computer.
When two memory cards are mounted in this
camcorder, they are acknowledged as two
independent extended drives by the computer.
Note
Connecting External Devices
Note
Signals are not output from the A/V OUT connector
during the following settings
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy”
or “USB A.”
• When “Format” in “System” is set to 1920×1080/
59.94P, 50P.
Operating Clips With a
Computer
The camcorder does not work on the bus power from the
computer.
Operating Clips With a Computer
127
To check the connection to the camcorder
1
Connect the PC connector of the
camcorder to the computer with the
supplied USB cable, then set the power
switch to ON to turn on the camcorder.
A message prompting you to confirm that
you wish to connect to the computer is
displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Note
This message will not be displayed while another
confirmation message or in-progress message (e.g.,
for formatting or restoration of an SxS memory
card) is shown on the screen. It appears when
formatting or restoration is completed. The message
is also not displayed while the CLIP INFO screen is
shown on the screen. It appears when an operation
on the CLIP INFO screen is completed or you
return to the thumbnail screen.
2
Select “Execute” by using the up/down/
left/right buttons or the jog dial.
3
With Windows, check that the memory
card is displayed as a removable disk in
My Computer.
With Macintosh, check that a “NO
NAME” or “Untitled” folder was
created on the desktop. (The Macintosh
folder name can be changed.)
Connecting External Devices
Notes
• The following operations must be eliminated when the
access lamp is lit in red.
—Turning the power off or disconnecting the power
cord
—Removing the SxS memory card
—Disconnecting the USB cable
• Operation is not guaranteed with all computers.
• Use the supplied USB cable for connection.
Removing an SxS memory card
Windows
1. Click on the icon of “Safely Remove
Hardware” on the task bar of the computer.
2. Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu.
3. Check that the Safe To Remove Hardware
message appears then remove the card.
Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to
Trash.
128
Operating Clips With a Computer
If the SxS memory card icon is located on Finder,
click on the eject icon on its side.
Note
Do not select “Card Power Off” from the SxS memory
card icon displayed on the menu bar.
Using the application software
To copy clips to the local disk of your computer,
the dedicated application software must be
downloaded and installed on your computer. For
details, see “Software Downloads” (page 174).
Although the data regarding recorded materials
are stored over multiple files and folders, you can
easily handle the clips without considering such
data and directory structure by using the
dedicated application software.
Note
If you operate, e.g. copy the clips on the SxS memory
card by using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder
(Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips
may not be maintained.
Using a nonlinear editing system
For a nonlinear editing system, optional editing
software that corresponds to the recording
formats used with this camcorder is required.
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your
computer in advance, using the dedicated
application software.
Connecting via i.LINK
(FAT only)
When an HDV-compatible video format (SP
1440×1080/59.94i, SP 1440×1080/50i, or SP
1440×1080/23.98P) or a DVCAM-compatible
video format (format of SD Mode) is selected,
setting “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page
106) of the VIDEO SET menu to “HDV” or
“DVCAM” enables signal inputs/outputs via the
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
You can record the same images as those
recorded on an SxS memory card in this
camcorder on an external device connected to the
i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector, or record playback
pictures of the external device on the memory
card in the camcorder.
DVCAM stream audio is only available in 48 kHz
16-bit 2-channel lock audio format.
Notes
While recording (or standing by to record), the
picture being shot with this camcorder is output as
an HDV or DVCAM stream via the i.LINK
(HDV/DV) connector. It can be recorded on a
connected HDV or DVCAM recorder in
synchronization with the REC START/STOP
operation on this camcorder.
1
Perform the preparatory settings of the
camcorder.
• “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page
106) of the VIDEO SET menu
• “Trigger Mode” (page 120) of the
OTHERS menu
2
Set the external device to recording
standby status.
3
Start recording with the camcorder.
The external device starts recording in
synchronization.
The status of the external device is displayed in
the i.LINK status indication area (page 14) on the
LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Indication
Status of the external device
STBY HDV
In HDV recording standby
zREC HDV
In HDV recording
STBY
In DV recording standby
zREC
i.LINK and
are trademarks.
DV
DV
In DV recording
Notes
• Operation may be different depending on the type of
external device.
• There is some time lag from when you start recording
until the i.LINK status indication changes. Recording
does not start on the connected i.LINK device before it
enters synchronization even if “Trigger Mode” is set to
“Both.”
• While you can record shot marks on the memory card
during recording, they are not added to the pictures
recorded on the external device.
Connecting via i.LINK (FAT only)
Connecting External Devices
• Use the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector only for one-toone i.LINK connection.
• When you change a setting which affects output
signals from the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector, such as
“System” of the OTHERS menu or “SDI/HDMI/
i.LINK I/O Select” and “Down Converter” of the
VIDEO SET menu, disconnect the i.LINK cable then
change the setting. Changing such a setting with the
i.LINK cable connected may cause improper operation
of the connected i.LINK device.
• When “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to “Network&Prxoy,”
signals are not input/output from the i.LINK
connector.
Recording the Camcorder Picture
on an External Device
129
DVCAM50i, 25P SQ/EC: DVCAM stream
signal of 720×576/50i
Nonlinear Editing
When the camcorder is displaying thumbnails or
in playback mode, you can transfer an HDV
stream to a nonlinear editing system connected
via the i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector.
Other video formats and combination of input
signals cannot be recorded.
2
Set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select”
(page 106) of the VIDEO SET menu to
“HDV.”
3
Set “Input Source Select” (page 106) of
the VIDEO SET menu to “i.LINK.”
Notes
• The i.LINK (HDV/DV) connector of this camcorder is
a 4-pin connector. Check the number of pins of the
i.LINK connector on your computer and use an
appropriate i.LINK cable.
• In searching pictures of this camcorder on the
computer, it may take some time until the display is
reflected on the computer.
• If the playback clip is short or the playback starting
point is near the end of the clip, the i.LINK signal may
be interrupted between the clip and the next clip. When
you try to capture such a signal using the nonlinear
editing system, a malfunction may occur, depending
on the nonlinear editing software in use.
• If you specify a search speed other than 4, 15, or 24
times normal with the nonlinear editing system, no
i.LINK signal is fed out. In such a case, the picture on
the LCD monitor may stay frozen.
• High-speed playback picture may not be displayed on
the computer screen, depending on the nonlinear
editing software in use.
Setting on this camcorder
Set “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” (page 106)
of the VIDEO SET menu to “HDV” or
“DVCAM.”
Connecting External Devices
Recording External Input Signals
The input from a device connected via the i.LINK
(HDV/DV) connector can be recorded on an SxS
memory card in this camcorder. The timecodes
superimposed on the i.LINK input are recorded
regardless of the settings of the camcorder.
1
Set the external signal to a format that
can be recorded on the camcorder.
Depending on the video format (page 121)
setting of this unit, recordable input signals are
as follows:
• FAT HD Mode
SP 1440×1080/59.94i or SP 1440×1080/
23.98P: HDV stream signal of 1440×1080/
59.94i
SP 1440×1080/50i: HDV stream signal of
1440×1080/50i
• FAT SD Mode
DVCAM59.94i, 29.97P SQ/EC: DVCAM
stream signal of 720×480/59.94i
130
Connecting via i.LINK (FAT only)
The input image is displayed on the LCD
monitor/EVF screen and the monitor connected
via the VIDEO OUT connector.
The audio signal is output from the built-in
speaker, headphones connected to the
headphone connector, and the speaker of the
monitor connected to the AUDIO OUT
connector.
4
Press the REC START/STOP button
(page 10) or the REC START button
(page 13).
Recording begins.
Notes
• An error is generated in the following cases. In such a
case, cancel Recording mode by pressing the REC
START/STOP button.
—The video format of input signal does not match
that specified on the camcorder.
—A copy-protected stream is being fed in.
• If the input to the camcorder becomes no signal during
recording, the tally lamps and the i.LINK zREC status
indication on the LCD monitor/EVF screen flash,
indicating that no signal is being recorded on the SxS
memory card.
When an input signal is resumed, recording is
restarted, incrementing the clip number on the memory
card.
External Synchronization
When multiple units of the camcorder are used in
the same shooting location, recording can be
made in synchronization with a specific reference
signal, and the timecode can be matched among
all the units.
Aligning the phase of the video signal
(Genlock)
Video format
Valid reference
signal
XAVC-I 720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/29.97P
HD422 50/720/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
IMX50 59.94i SQ/EC
IMX50 29.97P SQ/EC
DVCAM 59.94i SQ/EC
DVCAM 29.97P SQ/EC
1080/59.94i
720/59.94P
NTSC
1080/59.94i
NTSC
Genlock operation is enabled by supplying a
reference signal to the GENLOCK IN connector
(page 12) of the camcorder.
Valid reference signals depend on the video
format selected.
1) 23.98P Output: 59.94i (2-3 Pull Down))
2) 23.98P Output: 23.98PsF
Video format
Valid reference
signal
For “NTSC/NTSC(J) Area”
MXF
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
SP 1440×1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P 1)
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P 1)
SP 1440×1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P 2)
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P 2)
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/29.97P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
1080/59.94i
NTSC
Valid reference
signal
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P
XAVC-I 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L25 1080/59.94i
XAVC-I 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P 1)
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P 1)
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P 1)
HD422 50/1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
HD422 50/1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P 1)
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P 1)
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P 1)
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P 2)
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P 2)
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P 2)
HD422 50/1080/23.98P 2)
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P 2)
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P 2)
1080/59.94i
NTSC
1080/23.98PsF
NTSC
1080/59.94i
720/59.94P
NTSC
1) 23.98P Output: 59.94i (2-3 Pull Down))
2) 23.98P Output: 23.98PsF
AVI
Video format
Valid reference
signal
DVCAM 59.94i SQ/EC
DVCAM 29.97P SQ/EC
1080/59.94i
NTSC
Connecting External Devices
Video format
MP4
1080/23.98PsF
NTSC
External Synchronization
131
For “PAL Area”
MXF
Notes
Video format
Valid reference
signal
XAVC-L50 1080/50P
XAVC-L35 1080/50P
XAVC-I 1080/50i
XAVC-L50 1080/50i
XAVC-L35 1080/50i
XAVC-L25 1080/50i
XAVC-I 1080/25P
XAVC-L50 1080/25P
XAVC-L35 1080/25P
HD422 50/1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i
HD422 50/1080/25P
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/25P
XAVC-I 720/50P
XAVC-L50 720/50P
HD422 50/720/50P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HD422 50/720/25P
IMX50 50i SQ/EC
IMX50 25P SQ/EC
DVCAM 50i SQ/EC
DVCAM 25P SQ/EC
1080/50i
PAL
Synchronizing the timecode of your
camcorder with that of another unit
1080/50i
720/50P
PAL
Set the unit that supplies the timecode to a mode
in which the timecode output keeps advancing
(Free Run or Clock mode).
1
1080/50i
PAL
MP4
Connecting External Devices
Video format
Valid reference
signal
HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i
SP 1440×1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/25P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HQ 1280×720/25P
1080/50i
PAL
1080/50i
720/50P
PAL
AVI
Video format
Valid reference
signal
DVCAM 50i SQ/EC
DVCAM 25P SQ/EC
1080/50i
PAL
The phase adjustment for the reference signal can
also be made with “Genlock” (page 120) of the
OTHERS menu.
132
• When the output format is SD Mode and you use one
of the video formats below, genlock is not possible. Set
the video format to HD Mode.
MXF: XAVC-I 720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
XAVC-I 720/50P
XAVC-L50 720/50P
HD422 50/720/50P
HQ 1280×720/50P
MP4: HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/50P
• If the reference signal is unstable, genlock is not
possible.
• The subcarrier is not synchronized.
External Synchronization
Set “Timecode” of the TC/UB SET
menu as follows:
Mode: Preset
Run: Free Run
2
Press the DURATION/TC/U-BIT
button (page 10) so that the timecode is
displayed on the screen.
3
Confirm that the IN/OUT switch (page
12) is set to IN, then supply an HD or SD
reference video signal to the
GENLOCK IN connector and the
reference timecode to the TC IN
connector.
The built-in timecode generator of your
camcorder locks to the reference timecode, and
the message “EXT-LK” is displayed on the
screen.
About 10 seconds after locking, even if the
reference timecode from the external device is
disconnected, the external lock will be kept.
Notes
• Check that the reference timecode and the reference
video signal are in a phase relation that complies the
SMPTE timecode standards.
• When you finish the above procedure, the timecode is
immediately synchronized with the external timecode,
and the time data indication will show the value of the
external timecode. However, wait for a few seconds
until the timecode generator stabilizes before
recording.
• If the frequency of the reference video signal and the
frame frequency are not the same, a lock cannot be
acquired, and the camcorder will not operate properly.
In such a case, the timecode will not be correctly
locked to the external timecode.
• When the connection is removed, the timecode
advance may shift one frame per hour with respect to
the reference timecode.
To release the external timecode
synchronization
Change the “Timecode” setting of the TC/UB
SET menu or set the camcorder to off.
External synchronization is also released when
you start recording in a special recording mode
(Slow & Quick Motion, Frame Rec, or Interval
Rec).
Synchronizing the timecode of another
unit with that of your camcorder
Specify the timecode of your camcorder
with “Timecode” and “TC Format” of
the TC/UB SET menu (page 36).
2
Confirm that the IN/OUT switch (page
12) is set to OUT, then connect the TC
OUT connector and VIDEO OUT
connector (page 12) with the timecode
input and reference signal input of the
other unit, respectively.
Connecting External Devices
1
The timecode to be output from the TC OUT
connector depends on the setting of “TC Out” in
“Timecode” of the TC/UB SET menu. If “TC
Out” is set to “Generator,” the timecode
generated by the timecode generator of the
camcorder is output during recording and
playback. If “TC Out” is set to “Auto,” the
timecode generated by the timecode generator is
output during recording, and that superimposed
with the video signal is output during playback.
External Synchronization
133
Appendices
Important Notes on Operation
Use and Storage
Do not subject the unit to severe shock
• The internal mechanism may be damaged or the
body warped.
• If an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe
is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe
may be damaged. In such a case, stop using it
and contact your dealer or a Sony service
representative.
Do not cover the unit while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can
cause excessive internal heat build-up.
After use
Always set the power switch to OFF.
Before storing the unit for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
Grip the handle when carrying
Grip the handle to carry. If you carry it by other
parts, such as the front microphone block or the
LCD monitor block, the camcorder may drop,
causing injury.
Do not leave the camcorder with the lenses
facing the sun
Direct sunlight can enter through the lenses, be
focused in the camcorder, and cause fire.
Shipping
Appendices
• Remove the memory cards before transporting
the unit.
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other
transportation service, pack it in the shipping
carton of the unit.
Care of the unit
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lens
using a blower.
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft,
dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in
a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not
use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner, as
these may cause discoloration or other damage to
the finish of the unit.
134
Important Notes on Operation
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with the unit,
contact your Sony dealer.
The fan and battery are consumable parts
that will need periodic replacement
The fan and battery are consumable parts that will
need periodic replacement.
When operating at room temperature, a normal
replacement cycle will be about 5 years.
However, this replacement cycle represents only
a general guideline and does not imply that the
life expectancy of these parts is guaranteed. For
details on parts replacement, contact your dealer.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or
storing the unit in the following places:
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature
range: 0ºC to 40ºC or 32ºF to 104ºF)
Remember that in summer in warm climates the
temperature inside a car with the windows
closed can easily exceed 50ºC (122ºF).
• In damp or dusty locations
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain
• Locations subject to violent vibration
• Near strong magnetic fields
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
To prevent electromagnetic interference from
portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this unit can result
in malfunctions and interference with audio and
video signals.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this unit be
powered off.
Note on laser beams
Laser beams may damage the CMOS image
sensors. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser
beam, be careful not to let the laser beam be
directed into the lens of the camcorder.
About the LCD panels
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured
with high precision technology, giving a
functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a
very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”,
either always off (black), always on (red, green,
or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long
period of use, because of the physical
characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such
“stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These
problems are not a malfunction. Note that any
such problems have no effect on recorded data.
On condensation
If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm
location, or if ambient temperature suddenly
rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of
the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known as
condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off the
unit and wait until the condensation clears before
operating the unit. Operating the unit while
condensation is present may damage the unit.
Flicker
If recording is made under lighting produced by
discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or
mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker,
colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear
distorted.
In such cases, set the Flicker-Reduction function
to Auto mode (page 35).
In some cases, such phenomena may not be
improved with the Flicker-Reduction function.
It is recommend to set the electronic shutter speed
to 1/100 sec. in 50-Hz areas and to 1/60 in 60-Hz
areas.
The following phenomena that may appear in
images are specific to CMOS (Complementary
Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors.
They do not indicate malfunctions.
Flash band
The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen
may change when shooting a flashlight beam or a
light source that quickly flashes.
White flecks
Although the CMOS image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc.
This is related to the principle of CMOS image
sensors and is not a malfunction.
Note on the EVF display
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the
following cases:
• when operating at a high environmental
temperature
• when you have raised the master gain
(sensitivity)
• when operating in Slow-Shutter mode
• Pictures on the LCD monitor and EVF screen
may be distorted by the following operations:
—Changing the video format
—Rec Review
—Starting playback from the Thumbnail
screen
—Reversing the LCD monitor
—Switching the Expanded Focus display
• When you change the eye direction in the EVF,
you may see primary colors red, green, and
blue, but this is not a defect of the camcorder.
These primary colors are not recorded on any
recording media.
Appendices
Phenomena specific to CMOS image
sensors
Focal plane
Owing to the characteristics of the pickup
elements (CMOS sensors) for reading video
signals, subjects that quickly move across the
screen may appear slightly skewed.
Aliasing
When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they
may appear jagged or flicker.
Important Notes on Operation
135
Fragmentation
About GPS
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced
properly, try formatting the recording medium.
While repeating picture recording/playback with
a certain recording medium for an extended
period, files in the medium may be fragmented,
disabling proper recording/storage. In such a
case, make a backup of clips in the medium then
perform formatting of the medium using “Format
Media” (page 123) of the OTHERS menu.
The GPS (Global Positioning System) is a system
that calculates geographical location from highly
accurate US space satellites.
This system allows you to pinpoint your exact
location on the earth.
The GPS satellites are located in 6 orbits,
20,000 km above the earth. The GPS system
consists of 24 or more GPS satellites. A GPS
receiver receives radio signals from the satellites,
and calculates the current location of the receiver
based on the orbital information (almanac data)
and travel time of the signals, etc.
Determining a location is called “triangulating.”
A GPS receiver can determine the location’s
latitude and longitude by receiving signals from 3
or more satellites.
• As the positions of GPS satellites vary
constantly, it may take longer to determine the
location or the receiver may not be able to
determine the location at all, depending on the
location and time you use the camcorder.
• “GPS” is a system for determining geographic
location by triangulating radio signals from
GPS satellites. Avoid using the camcorder in
places where radio signals are blocked or
reflected, such as a shadowy place surrounded
by buildings or trees, etc. Use the camcorder in
open sky environments.
• You may not be able to record location
information at locations or in situations where
radio signals from the GPS satellites do not
reach the camcorder as follows.
—In tunnels, indoors or under the shade of
buildings.
—Between tall buildings or at narrow streets
surrounded by buildings.
—In underground locations, locations
surrounded by dense trees, under an
elevated bridge, or in locations where
magnetic fields are generated, such as near
high voltage cables.
—Near devices that generate radio signals of
the same frequency band as the camcorder:
near 1.5 GHz band mobile telephones, etc.
• If you upload and share the images which are
recorded with the setting “GPS” is “On”, the
record location may be exposed on the internet
even if you do not intend to do so. If you do not
want to record location information, select
“Off” for “GPS” (page 124).
Notes on security
Appendices
136
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING
FROM A FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT
PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON
TRANSMISSION DEVICES,
UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS
RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION
SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY
PROBLEMS OF ANY KIND.
• Depending on the operating environment,
unauthorized third parties on the network may
be able to access the unit. When connecting the
unit to the network, be sure to confirm that the
network is protected securely.
• Communication content may be unknowingly
intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the
vicinity of the signals. When using wireless
LAN communication, implement security
measures properly to protect the
communication content.
• From a safety standpoint, when using the unit
connected with the network, it is strongly
recommended to access the Control window via
a Web browser and change the access limitation
settings from the factory preset values (page
75).
Changing the password regularly is also
recommended.
• Do not browse any other website in the Web
browser while making settings or after making
settings. Since the login status remains in the
Web browser, close the Web browser when you
complete the settings to prevent unauthorized
third parties from using the unit or harmful
programs from running.
Important Notes on Operation
On triangulating errors
• If you move to another location right after
setting “GPS” to “On” in the menu, it may take
a longer time for the camcorder to start
triangulating, compared to when you stay in the
same place.
• Error caused by the position of GPS satellites
The camcorder automatically triangulates your
current location when the camcorder receives
radio signals from 3 or more GPS satellites. The
triangulating error allowed by the GPS satellites
is about 10 m (33 feet). Depending on the
environment of the location, the triangulating
error can be greater. In this case, your actual
location may not match the location on the map
based on the GPS information. Meanwhile, the
GPS satellites are controlled by the United
States Department of Defense, and the degree of
accuracy may be changed intentionally.
• Error during the triangulating process
The camcorder acquires location information
periodically during triangulating.
On the restriction of use of GPS
Use GPS in accordance with the regulations of the
situation, the countries/regions of use.
On the geographic coordinate system
The “WGS-84” geographic coordinate system is
used.
Appendices
Important Notes on Operation
137
Video Format (Format)
The video formats that can be selected at “Format” in “System” (page 121) of the OTHERS menu are listed below.
The default settings set at the factory are shown in bold face (example: HD422 50/1080/59.94i)
UDF HD Mode
Country setting
NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area
PAL Area
Selectable video format
HD422 50/1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
HD422 50/1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
HD422 50/720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/29.97P
HD422 50/720/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
HD422 50/1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i
HD422 50/1080/25P
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/25P
HD422 50/720/50P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HD422 50/720/25P
UDF SD Mode
NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area
PAL Area
Selectable video format
IMX50 59.94i SQ
IMX50 59.94i EC
DVCAM 59.94i SQ
DVCAM 59.94i EC
IMX50 29.97P SQ
IMX50 29.97P EC
DVCAM 29.97P SQ
DVCAM 29.97P EC
IMX50 50i SQ
IMX50 50i EC
DVCAM 50i SQ
DVCAM 50i EC
IMX50 25P SQ
IMX50 25P EC
DVCAM 25P SQ
DVCAM 25P EC
Appendices
Country setting
138
Video Format (Format)
exFAT HD Mode
Country setting
NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area
MXF file format
XAVC
MPEG2
Selectable video format
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P
XAVC-I 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L25 1080/59.94i
XAVC-I 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P
XAVC-I 720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 720/59.94P
HD422 50/1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
HD422 50/1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
HD422 50/720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/29.97P
HD422 50/720/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
Country setting
PAL Area
MXF file format
XAVC
MPEG2
Selectable video format
XAVC-L50 1080/50P
XAVC-L35 1080/50P
XAVC-I 1080/50i
XAVC-L50 1080/50i
XAVC-L35 1080/50i
XAVC-L25 1080/50i
XAVC-I 1080/25P
XAVC-L50 1080/25P
XAVC-L35 1080/25P
XAVC-I 720/50P
XAVC-L50 720/50P
HD422 50/1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i
HD422 50/1080/25P
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/25P
HD422 50/720/50P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HD422 50/720/25P
Country setting
NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area
PAL Area
Selectable video format
DVCAM 59.94i SQ
DVCAM 59.94i EC
DVCAM 29.97P SQ
DVCAM 29.97P EC
DVCAM 50i SQ
DVCAM 50i EC
DVCAM 25P SQ
DVCAM 25P EC
exFAT SD Mode
Appendices
Video Format (Format)
139
FAT HD Mode
Country setting
NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area
PAL Area
Selectable video format
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
SP 1440×1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
SP 1440×1080/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/29.97P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i
SP 1440×1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/25P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HQ 1280×720/25P
FAT SD Mode
Country setting
NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area
PAL Area
Selectable video format
DVCAM 59.94i SQ
DVCAM 59.94i EC
DVCAM 29.97P SQ
DVCAM 29.97P EC
DVCAM 50i SQ
DVCAM 50i EC
DVCAM 25P SQ
DVCAM 25P EC
Appendices
140
Video Format (Format)
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
Video Formats and Output Signals
Output formats for the SDI OUT connector
Serial digital signals from the SDI OUT connector are output depending on the settings of the setup menu
and format of the clip being played.
The output format is converted when using the settings in the following chart.
Notes
• When the format is UDF HD Mode, exFAT HD Mode, or FAT HD Mode and “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the
VIDEO SET menu is set to “SD SDI & SD HDMI i,” a down-converted SD signal is output.
• When “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” in the VIDEO SET menu is set to other than “3G SDI & HD HDMI,” “HD SDI
& HD HDMI,” or “SD SDI & SD HDMI i,” signals are not output from the SDI OUT connector.
While recording or standing by to record
Input format
Output format
“Format” in “System” of
the OTHERS menu
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
3G SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
HD SDI & HD HDMI
59.94P (XAVC-L)
1920×1080/59.94P 1)
SD/59.94i 4)
1920×1080/59.94i 4)
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
1920×1080/59.94i
SD/59.94i
1920×1080/29.97PsF
1280×720/59.94P 5)
SD/29.97PsF
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
1920×1080/59.94i 2)
SD/59.94i
23.98P(SP)
1920×1080/59.94i
1280×720/59.94P
–
–
1920×1080/50P 1)
1920×1080/50i 4)
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/25PsF
1280×720/50P 5)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P
50i (DVCAM/IMX)
25P (DVCAM/IMX)
–
–
SD/59.94i 4)
SD/59.94i
SD/29.97PsF
SD/50i 4)
Appendices
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX)
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX)
50P (XAVC-L)
1920×1080/23.98PsF 3)
1280×720/59.94P 5)
SD/50i
SD/25PsF
SD/50i 4)
SD/50i
SD/25PsF
1) For 3G SDI & HD HDMI.
2) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “59.94i(2-3 Pull Down).”
3) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “23.98PsF.”
4) Converted to interlace from progressive.
5) When the format is 720.
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
141
During clip playback
Output format
Format of the played clip
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L)
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
3G SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
HD SDI & HD HDMI
1920×1080/59.94P 1)
SD/59.94i 4)
1920×1080/59.94i 4)
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
1920×1080/59.94i
SD/59.94i
1920×1080/29.97PsF
1280×720/59.94P 1)
SD/29.97PsF
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
1920×1080/59.94i 2)
SD/59.94i
23.98P (SP)
1920×1080/59.94i
1280×720/59.94P
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX)
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L)
1920×1080/23.98PsF 3)
1280×720/59.94P 6)
–
–
1920×1080/50P 1)
1920×1080/50i 4)
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/25PsF
1280×720/50P 5)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P
50i (DVCAM/IMX)
25P (DVCAM/IMX)
–
–
SD/59.94i 4)
SD/59.94i
SD/29.97PsF
SD/50i 4)
SD/50i
SD/25PsF
SD/50i 4)
SD/50i
SD/25PsF
1) For 3G SDI & HD HDMI.
2) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “59.94i(2-3 Pull Down)” and the format of the played
clip is 1080.
3) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “23.98PsF” and the format of the played clip is 1080.
4) Converted to interlace from progressive.
5) When the format is 720.
6) When the format of the played clip is 720. When playing a PureP clip that is recorded in FAT/HQ 1280×720/23.98P,
Appendices
it is played by pull-down automatically.
142
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
When a thumbnail screen is displayed
Input format
“Format” in “System” of
the OTHERS menu
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L)
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
23.98P (SP)
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX)
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L)
Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
3G SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
HD SDI & HD HDMI
1920×1080/59.94i 3)
1920×1080/59.94i
1280×720/59.94P 4)
1920×1080/59.94i 1)
1920×1080/23.98PsF 2)
1280×720/59.94P 4)
1920×1080/59.94i
1280×720/59.94P
–
–
1920×1080/50i 3)
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i
SP)
1280×720/50P 4)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P
50i (DVCAM/IMX)
25P (DVCAM/IMX)
SD/59.94i 3)
SD/59.94i
–
–
SD/59.94i 3)
SD/59.94i
SD/50i 3)
SD/50i
SD/50i 3)
SD/50i
1) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “59.94i(2-3 Pull Down).”
2) When “23.98P OUTPUT” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “23.98PsF.”
3) Converted to interlace from progressive.
4) When the format is 720.
Appendices
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
143
Output formats from the HDMI OUT connector
Serial digital signals from the HDMI OUT connector are output depending on the settings of the setup
menu and format of the clip being played.
The output format is converted when using the settings in the following chart.
Note
When the format is UDF HD Mode, exFAT HD Mode, or FAT HD Mode and “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the
VIDEO SET menu is set to “SD SDI & SD HDMI i,” a down-converted SD signal is output.
While recording or standing by to record
Input format
“Format” in “System” of
the OTHERS menu
59.94P (XAVC-L)
Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
3G SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
SD HDMI P & HDV
HD SDI & HD HDMI
SD HDMI i & HDV
SD HDMI P
HD HDMI & HDV
SD HDMI i & DVCAM
SD/59.94P
1920×1080/59.94i 1)
SD/59.94i 1)
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
1920×1080/59.94i
SD/59.94i
SD/59.94P 2)
1920×1080/29.97PsF
1280×720/59.94P 3)
SD/29.97PsF
SD/59.94P
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ/SP)
1920×1080/59.94i
1280×720/59.94P 3)
1280×720/59.94P
SD/59.94i
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX)
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX)
50P (XAVC-L)
–
–
1920×1080/50i 1)
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/25PsF
1280×720/50P 3)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P
50i (DVCAM/IMX)
25P (DVCAM/IMX)
Appendices
144
–
–
1) Converted to interlace from progressive.
2) Converted to progressive from interlace.
3) When the format is 720.
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
SD/59.94i 1)
SD/59.94i
SD/29.97PsF
SD/50i 1)
SD/50i
–
–
SD/50P
SD/50P 2)
SD/25PsF
SD/50P
SD/50i 1)
SD/50i
SD/25PsF
–
–
During clip playback
Output format
Format of the played clip
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L)
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
3G SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
SD HDMI P & HDV
HD SDI & HD HDMI
SD HDMI i & HDV
SD HDMI P
HD HDMI & HDV
SD HDMI i & DVCAM
SD/59.94P
1920×1080/59.94i 1)
SD/59.94i 1)
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
1920×1080/59.94i
SD/59.94i
SD/59.94P 2)
1920×1080/29.97PsF
1280×720/59.94P 3)
SD/29.97PsF
SD/59.94P
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ/SP)
1920×1080/59.94i
1280×720/59.94P 4)
1280×720/59.94P
SD/59.94i
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX)
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L)
–
–
1920×1080/50i 1)
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/25PsF
1280×720/50P 3)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P
50i (DVCAM/IMX)
25P (DVCAM/IMX)
–
–
SD/59.94i 3)
SD/59.94i
SD/29.97PsF
SD/50i 1)
SD/50i
–
–
SD/50P
SD/50P 2)
SD/25PsF
SD/50P
SD/50i 1)
SD/50i
SD/25PsF
–
–
1) Converted to interlace from progressive.
2) Converted to progressive from interlace.
3) When the format is 720.
4) When the format of the played clip is 720. When playing a PureP clip that is recorded in FAT/HQ 1280×720/23.98P,
it is played by pull-down automatically.
When a thumbnail screen is displayed
Input format
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L)
59.94i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ/SP)
29.97P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
1920×1080/59.94i
23.98P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
1920×1080/59.94i
1280×720/59.94P 3)
1280×720/59.94P
59.94P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/
HQ)
59.94i (DVCAM/IMX)
29.97P (DVCAM/IMX)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L)
SD/59.94i
SD/59.94P 2)
1920×1080/59.94i
1280×720/59.94P 3)
–
–
1920×1080/50i 1)
Appendices
“Format” in “System” of
the OTHERS menu
Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
3G SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
SD HDMI P & HDV
HD SDI & HD HDMI
SD HDMI i & HDV
SD HDMI P
HD HDMI & HDV
SD HDMI i & DVCAM
SD/59.94P
SD/59.94i 1)
1920×1080/59.94i 1)
SD/59.94P
SD/59.94i 1)
SD/59.94i
SD/50i 1)
–
–
SD/50P
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
145
Input format
Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
“Format” in “System” of 3G SDI & HD HDMI
SD SDI & SD HDMI i
SD HDMI P & HDV
HD SDI & HD HDMI
SD HDMI i & HDV
SD HDMI P
the OTHERS menu
HD HDMI & HDV
SD HDMI i & DVCAM
50i (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ/ 1920×1080/50i
SD/50i
SD/50P 2)
SP)
25P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1920×1080/50i
SD/50P
1280×720/50P 3)
50P (XAVC-I/XAVC-L/HD/HQ) 1280×720/50P
SD/50i 2)
50i (DVCAM/IMX)
25P (DVCAM/IMX)
–
–
SD/50i
–
–
1) Converted to interlace from progressive.
2) Converted to progressive from interlace.
3) When the format is 720.
Output formats from the VIDEO OUT connector
Signals output from the VIDEO OUT connector are either the HD-Y signals output from the SDI OUT
connector/HDMI OUT connector (when outputting HD from the SDI OUT connector or HDMI OUT
connector), or analog composite signals (when outputting SD from the SDI OUT connector or HDMI
OUT connector).
Signals of clips recorded in a different system from the setting of “Country” in “System” of the OTHERS
menu are converted to the following frame rates for simplified playback before output.
When you play clips recorded with the PAL system while the “Country” is set to “NTSC Area/NTSC(J)
Area.”
Some frames may be repeated due to frame rate conversion.
Playback clip video format
Appendices
146
XAVC-L50 1080/50P
XAVC-L35 1080/50P
XAVC-I 1080/50i
XAVC-L50 1080/50i
XAVC-L35 1080/50i
XAVC-L25 1080/50i
HD422 50/1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i
SP 1440×1080/50i
XAVC-I 1080/25P
XAVC-L50 1080/25P
XAVC-L35 1080/25P
HD422 50/1080/25P
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/25P
XAVC-I 720/50P
XAVC-L50 720/50P
HD422 50/720/50P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HD422 50/720/25P
HQ 1280×720/25P
VIDEO OUT Output format
HD-Y
1920×1080/60i
Analog composite
SD/59.94i
1920×1080/30PsF
SD/29.97PsF
1280×720/60P
SD/59.94i
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
SD/29.97PsF
Playback clip video format
DVCAM50i SQ/EC
DVCAM25P SQ/EC
IMX50/50i SQ/EC
IMX50/25P SQ/EC
VIDEO OUT Output format
HD-Y
Cannot be played
Analog composite
Cannot be played
When you play clips recorded with the NTSC system while the “Country” is set to “PAL Area.”
Some frames may be deleted due to frame rate conversion.
Playback clip video format
Analog composite
SD/50i
1920×1080/24.97PsF
SD/25PsF
1280×720/49.95P
SD/50i
SD/25PsF
Cannot be played
Appendices
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94P
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94P
XAVC-I 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L50 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L35 1080/59.94i
XAVC-L25 1080/59.94i
HD422 50/1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
SP 1440×1080/59.94i
XAVC-I 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L50 1080/29.97P
XAVC-L35 1080/29.97P
HD422 50/1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
XAVC-I 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 1080/23.98P
XAVC-L35 1080/23.98P
HD422 50/1080/23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
SP 1440×1080/23.98P
XAVC-I 720/59.94P
XAVC-L50 720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HD422 50/720/29.97P
HQ 1280×720/29.97P
HD422 50/720/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
DVCAM59.94i SQ/EC
DVCAM29.97P SQ/EC
IMX50/59.94i SQ/EC
IMX50/29.97P SQ/EC
VIDEO OUT Output format
HD-Y
1920×1080/49.95i
Cannot be played
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
147
Output formats from the i.LINK I/O connector
Serial digital signals from the i.LINK I/O connector are output in the following formats depending on the
settings of the setup menu and format of the clip being played.
Notes
• When “F.Sys.” in the OTHERS menu is set to “UDF” or “exFAT,” signals are not output from the i.LINK I/O
connector.
• When “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu is set to “3G SDI & HD HDMI,” “HD SDI & HD
HDMI,” “SD SDI & SD HDMI i,” or “SD HDMI P,” signals are not output from the i.LINK I/O connector.
While recording (or standing by to record)/When playing a clip
When recording:
“Format” in “System” of
the OTHERS menu
When playing: Playback
clip video format
HQ 1920×1080/59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/29.97P
HQ 1440×1080/29.97P
HQ 1920×1080/23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/23.98P
SP 1440×1080/59.94i
SP 1440×1080/23.98P
HQ 1280×720/59.94P
HQ 1280×720/29.97P
HQ 1280×720/23.98P
DVCAM59.94i SQ/EC
DVCAM29.97P SQ/EC
HQ 1920×1080/50i
HQ 1440×1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/25P
HQ 1440×1080/25P
SP 1440×1080/50i
HQ 1280×720/50P
Appendices
148
Output format
Setting of “SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select” of the VIDEO SET menu
HD HDMI & HDV
SD HDMI i & DVCAM
SD HDMI i & HDV
SD HDMI P & HDV
No signal
SD/59.94i
SD/29.97PsF
No signal
1440×1080/59.94i
SD/59.94i
1440×1080/59.94i 1)
No signal
SD/59.94i 1)
No signal
SD/59.94i 2)
SD/29.97PsF
No signal
SD/59.94i
SD/29.97PsF
SD/50i
SD/25PsF
1440×1080/50i
No signal
HQ 1280×720/25P
DVCAM50i SQ/EC
DVCAM25P SQ/EC
1) 59.94i provided through 2-3 pulldown of 23.98P.
2) 59.94i provided through conversion from 59.94P.
3) 50i provided through conversion from 50P.
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
SD/50i
SD/50i 3)
SD/25PsF
SD/50i
SD/25PsF
Limitations of Inputs/Outputs
The outputs from the camcorder are limited by the menu settings as follows:
×: no signal
Menu setting
System
F.Sys.
HD/SD
Output
SDI/HDMI/ SDI
i.LINK I/O OUT
Select
UDF
HD SDI & HD
HDMI
SD SDI & SD
HDMI i
SD HDMI P
Off
3G SDI & HD
HDMI
exFAT
FAT
HD
HD
HD/HQ
HD/SP
FAT
VIDEO
OUT
A/V
OUT
HD
HD
×
HD-Y
×
SD
SD
×
Composite Composite ×
×
×
SD-P
×
HD
×
×
×
×
×
×
Composite Composite ×
×
×
HD-Y 2)
HD
×
HD-Y 2)
SD
×
Composite 2) Composite 2) ×
SD-P
×
×
×
×
HD
HD
×
×
×
Composite 2) Composite 2) ×
HD-Y
×
×
SD
SD
×
Composite Composite ×
×
SD
DVCAM
Composite Composite DVCAM
×
×
HD
SD-P
×
HD
×
×
×
×
×
×
Composite Composite ×
HD-Y
×
×
SD
SD
×
Composite Composite ×
×
HD
HDV
HD-Y
×
SD
HDV
Composite Composite HDV
×
SD-P
HDV
×
×
SD
DVCAM
Composite Composite DVCAM
×
SD
×
SD
×
×
Composite Composite ×
Composite Composite ×
×
SD
×
SD
×
×
Composite Composite ×
Composite Composite ×
×
SD
DVCAM
Composite Composite DVCAM
×
×
×
Composite Composite ×
×
×
×
×
×
HDV
HDV
Appendices
UDF/exFAT SD
i.LINK
3G 1)
HD
HD SDI & HD HD
HDMI
SD SDI & SD SD
HDMI i
SD HDMI P
×
Off
×
HD SDI & HD
HDMI
SD SDI & SD
HDMI i
SD HDMI i &
DVCAM
SD HDMI P
Off
HD SDI & HD
HDMI
SD SDI & SD
HDMI i
HD HDMI &
HDV
SD HDMI i &
HDV
SD HDMI P &
HDV
SD HDMI i &
DVCAM
Off
SD SDI & SD
HDMI i
Off
SD SDI & SD
HDMI i
SD HDMI i &
DVCAM
Off
Input
i.LINK
HDMI
OUT
1) When “Format” in “System” and the format of the played clip are 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P.
2) “×” (no signal) when “Format” in “System” is set to 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P.
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
149
Video Format and the Recording Function
The compatible recording functions for each video format are listed as below.
When “Country” is set to “NTSC Area/NTSC(J) Area”
(a: compatible, –: not compatible).
System
HD/ F.Sys. Format
SD
HD
Appendices
150
MXF
HD422 50/1080/
59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/
59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/
59.94i
HD422 50/1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/
UDF 29.97P, 23.98P
HD422 50/720/
59.94P
HQ 1280×720/
59.94P
HQ 1440×1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
HD422 50/720/
29.97P, 23.98P
HQ 1280×720/
23.98P
XAVC-L50, L35
1080/59.94P
XAVC-I 1080/
59.94i
XAVC-L50, L35,
L25 1080/59.94i
XAVC-I 1080/
exFAT 29.97P, 23.98P
XAVC-I 720/
59.94P
XAVC-L50, L35
1080/29.97P
XAVC-L50, L35
1080/23.98P
XAVC-L50 720/
59.94P
Normal
Interval
Recording Recording
Frame
Recording
SDI/HDMI/
i.LINK I/O
Select
Other HDV
than or
the
DVC
right AM
Clip
Picture
Slow &
Continuous Cache
Quick
Recording Recording Motion
Proxy
Simultaneous
Recording Recording in
the 2 slots
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
–
–
a
–
–
a
a
–
–
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
–
a
a
a
–
a
a1)
–
a
a
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
a
–
a
a1)
a
a
a
a
a
–
a
a
a
a
a
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
System
HD/ F.Sys. Format
SD
HD
Clip
Picture
Slow &
Continuous Cache
Quick
Recording Recording Motion
Proxy
Simultaneous
Recording Recording in
the 2 slots
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
–
–
a
–
–
a
a
–
–
–
a
a
–
–
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
–
a
a
a
–
a
a
a
–
a
a
a
–
a
a
a
–
a
–
a
–
a
–
–
–
a
–
–
–
a
a
–
–
a
a
–
–
a
a
a
–
a
a
–
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
–
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
–
–
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
Appendices
SD
HD422 50/1080/
59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/
59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/
59.94i
HD422 50/1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
HQ 1920×1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
exFAT HD422 50/720/
59.94P
HQ 1280×720/
59.94P
HQ 1440×1080/
29.97P, 23.98P
HD422 50/720/
29.97P, 23.98P
HQ 1280×720/
23.98P
MP4
HQ 1920×1080/
59.94i
HQ 1440×1080/
59.94i, 29.97P
SP 1440×1080/
59.94i
HQ 1920×1080/
29.97P
HQ 1280×720/
FAT 59.94P
HQ 1920×1080/
23.98P
HQ 1440×1080/
23.98P
SP 1440×1080/
23.98P
HQ 1280×720/
29.97P
HQ 1280×720/
23.98P
MXF
IMX50 59.94i,
UDF 29.97P
DVCAM 59.94i,
29.97P
DVCAM 59.94i,
exFAT
29.97P
Normal
Interval
Recording Recording
Frame
Recording
SDI/HDMI/
i.LINK I/O
Select
Other HDV
than or
the
DVC
right AM
151
System
HD/ F.Sys. Format
SD
SD
FAT
AVI
DVCAM 59.94i,
29.97P
Normal
Interval
Recording Recording
Frame
Recording
SDI/HDMI/
i.LINK I/O
Select
Other HDV
than or
the
DVC
right AM
a
a
–
Clip
Picture
Slow &
Continuous Cache
Quick
Recording Recording Motion
–
a
–
Proxy
Simultaneous
Recording Recording in
the 2 slots
–
–
1) When XAVC-I is selected for “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS menu, the maximum picture cache time is 4
seconds.
When “Country” is set to “PAL Area”
(a: compatible, –: not compatible).
System
HD/
SD
F.Sys. Format
UDF
Appendices
HD
exFAT
152
Normal
Interval
Recording Recording
Frame
Recording
SDI/HDMI/
i.LINK I/O
Select
Other HDV
than or
the
DVC
right AM
Clip
Picture
Slow &
Continuous Cache
Quick
Recording Recording Motion
Proxy
Simultaneous
Recording Recording in
the 2 slots
MXF
HD422 50/1080/
50i
HQ 1920×1080/
50i
HQ 1440×1080/
50i
HD422 50/1080/
25P
HQ 1920×1080/
25P
HD422 50/720/
50P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HQ 1440×1080/
25P
HD422 50/720/
25P
XAVC-L50, L35
1080/50P
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
–
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
–
a
XAVC-I 1080/50i
a
a
–
a
a1)
–
a
a
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
a
–
a
a1)
a
a
a
XAVC-L50, L35,
L25 1080/50i
XAVC-I 1080/25P
XAVC-I 720/50P
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
System
HD/
SD
F.Sys. Format
exFAT
HD
FAT
SD
exFAT
FAT
Clip
Picture
Slow &
Continuous Cache
Quick
Recording Recording Motion
Proxy
Simultaneous
Recording Recording in
the 2 slots
a
a
–
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
a
a
a
–
–
a
a
–
–
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
–
a
a
a
–
a
a
–
–
a
–
a
–
a
a
–
–
a
a
–
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
–
–
a
a
–
a
a
–
–
–
a
a
–
–
a
–
–
–
Appendices
UDF
XAVC-L50, L35
1080/25P
XAVC-L50 720/
50P
HD422 50/1080/
50i
HQ 1920×1080/
50i
HQ 1440×1080/
50i
HD422 50/1080/
25P
HQ 1920×1080/
25P
HD422 50/720/
50P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HQ 1440×1080/
25P
HD422 50/720/
25P
MP4
HQ 1920×1080/
50i
HQ 1440×1080/
50i
SP 1440×1080/50i
HQ 1920×1080/
25P
HQ 1280×720/50P
HQ 1440×1080/
25P
HQ 1280×720/25P
MXF
IMX50 50i, 25P
DVCAM 50i, 25P
DVCAM 50i, 25P
AVI
DVCAM 50i, 25P
Normal
Interval
Recording Recording
Frame
Recording
SDI/HDMI/
i.LINK I/O
Select
Other HDV
than or
the
DVC
right AM
1) When XAVC-I is selected for “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS menu, the maximum picture cache time is 4
seconds.
Formats and Limitations of Outputs
153
Backup Battery
Replacement
This camcorder uses a backup battery to retain
various setting data.
A lithium battery (CR2032) for backup is
mounted in the camcorder at the factory.
The backup battery retains the date, time, and
timecode in Free Run mode even when no
operating power is being supplied.
Replacing the backup battery
Notes
• Be sure to set the power switch to OFF when replacing
the backup battery.
• Be careful not to drop the removed screw into the
camcorder.
1
Remove the screw of the backup battery
holder (page 13), then remove the cover.
Insert a nonmetalic item, such as a
plastic toothpick, to the side of the
battery and lever the battery out of its
compartment.
Service life of the backup battery
When the backup battery’s voltage falls, the
backup battery low-voltage warning appears on
the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
If this warning appears, replace the battery as
soon as possible.
32
CR20
3V
WARNING
• Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not
recharge, disassemble, or dispose of in fire.
• Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
2
Insert a new backup battery (CR2032)
with the + symbol on the battery facing
outside.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey
the law in the relative area or country.
Appendices
154
CR20
3V
3
Attach the cover in the original position.
32
CR20
3V
Backup Battery Replacement
32
Troubleshooting
Power
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The camcorder does not
power on when you set
the power switch to ON.
No battery pack is mounted and no
power is supplied to the DC IN
connector.
Mount a battery pack (page 18) or connect to AC
power using the BC-U1 or BC-U2 (page 19).
The battery pack is completely
exhausted.
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one
(page 18).
The power supply cuts
while operating.
The battery pack becomes exhausted. Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one
(page 18).
The battery pack becomes The ambient temperature is very low. This owes to the battery characteristics and is not a
exhausted very quickly.
defect.
The battery pack is inadequately
charged.
Recharge the battery pack (page 18).
If the battery pack is soon exhausted even after you
charged it fully, it may comes to the end of its life.
Replace it with a new one.
Recording/Playback
Symptoms
Cause
Recording does not start
when you press the REC
START/STOP button.
The power switch is set to OFF.
Set the power switch to ON.
The SxS memory card is writeprotected.
Release the write-protection, or replace the card with
a non-protected SxS memory card.
The SxS memory card is full.
Replace the card with one having sufficient space.
The SxS memory card needs
restoration.
Restore the memory card (page 24).
Set the power switch to ON.
The supplied IR Remote
Commander does not
work.
Remote control operation is disabled. Enable remote control operation (page 21).
The battery of the IR Remote
Commander is exhausted.
Replace the battery with a new one.
Audio recording is not
possible.
The AUDIO LEVEL CH-1/CH-2
knobs are set to the minimum level.
Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs (page 37).
The recorded sound is
distorted.
The audio level is too high.
Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs (page 37), and record
again.
The recorded sound has a The audio level is too low.
high noise level.
Appendices
Playback does not start
The power switch is set to OFF.
when you press the PLAY
button.
Remedy
Adjust the audio recording levels with the AUDIO
LEVEL CH-1/CH-2 knobs (page 37), and record
again.
Troubleshooting
155
External Devices
Symptoms
Cause
Remedy
The equipment connected It sometimes takes time for the
to the camcorder via an
connected equipment to recognize
i.LINK connection does the operation.
not react as expected, for
example, no picture
appears on its screen.
Wait for about 15 seconds. If the connected
equipment still does not react, do the following:
• Check the i.LINK cable, for example, by replugging it.
• Turn the power off, and connect the cable again.
• Change the i.LINK cable.
When Making a Wireless LAN Connection
Note
Obstructions and electromagnetic interference between the camcorder and wireless LAN access point or terminal device,
or the ambient environment (such as wall materials) could shorten the communication range or prevent connections
altogether. If you experience these problems, check the connection/communication status after moving the camcorder to
a new location, or bringing the camcorder and access point/terminal device closer together.
Symptoms
Remedy
The terminal device cannot access to the • Check the connection settings of the terminal device such as the IP address
camcorder.
setting, etc.
• The communication setting between the access point and client may be
invalid.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the access point.
You cannot log in to the camcorder.
Check the user name and password that you set.
The Web menu does not appear.
• Check the IP address setting.
• Check that the port number (:8080) is added to the IP address.
The wireless LAN cannot be used.
Your wireless LAN module may be unsupported.
For details about supported wireless modules, contact your Sony dealer or a
Sony service representative.
The Internet connection
Appendices
Symptoms
Remedy
The modem is not recognized.
Your modem may be unsupported.
For details about supported modems, contact your Sony dealer or a Sony
service representative.
The file uploading fails.
The user name and password of the server may not be correct. Input the
correct user name and password.
The file uploading is not available.
3G/4G/LTE signal conditions may be poor.
Move to another location and retry.
Wired LAN connection
156
Symptoms
Remedy
“E03-007 IP Address Setting Error”
appears.
There is a conflict in the network addresses of the Wireless LAN and IP
Address settings.
Change the address manually or change the settings for the network router.
Troubleshooting
Error/Warning Indications
The camcorder informs you of situations where warning, caution, or an operation check is required,
through messages on the LCD monitor/EVF screen, the tally lamps, and a buzzer.
The buzzer is output to the built-in speaker or to the headphones connected via the headphone connector.
The buzzer volume can be set with “Alarm Level” in “Audio Output” (page 105) of the AUDIO SET
menu.
Error Indications
The camcorder stops operation after the following indications.
Error indication on
LCD/EVF
Buzzer
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
E + Error code
Continuous
Rapidly
flashing
The camcorder may be defective. Recording stops even if
zREC is displayed on the LCD monitor/EVF screen.
Turn off the power and check the connected equipment, cables,
and media. If they are not defective, turn on the power again. If
the error persists, consult Sony service personnel.
(If power cannot be turned off by setting the power switch to
OFF, remove both the battery pack or the DC IN source.)
Warning Indications
When one of the following indications is generated, follow the message to clear the problem.
Buzzer
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
Media Near Full
Media (A) Near Full 2)
Intermittent
Flashing
Media Full
Media (A) Full 2)
Continuous
Rapidly
flashing
SD Card Full
Continuous
Rapidly
flashing
Battery Near End
Intermittent
Flashing
Battery End
Continuous
Rapidly
flashing
Temperature High
Intermittent
Flashing
Voltage Low
Intermittent
Flashing
Free space on the SxS memory card has become insufficient.
Replace it with another at the earliest opportunity.
When the Simultaneous Recording in 2 slots mode is set,
“Media (A) Near Full 2)” appears.
No space is left on the SxS memory card. Recording, clip
copying and clip division cannot be performed.
Replace it with another.
When the Simultaneous Recording in 2 slots mode is set,
“Media (A) Full 2)” appears.
No space is left on the SD card. Recording cannot be
performed.
Replace it with another.
The battery power will be exhausted soon.
Charge the battery pack at the earliest opportunity.
The battery pack is exhausted. Recording cannot be
performed.
Stop operation and change the battery pack.
The internal temperature has risen above a safe operation
limit.
Suspend operation, turn off the power, and wait until the
temperature falls.
The DC IN voltage has become low (stage 1).
Check the power supply.
Error/Warning Indications
Appendices
Warning indication
on LCD/EVF
157
Warning indication
on LCD/EVF
Buzzer
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
Insufficient Voltage
Continuous
Rapidly
flashing
HDD A1) Battery Near
End
Intermittent
Flashing
HDD A1) Battery End
Continuous
Rapidly
flashing
The DC IN voltage is too low (stage 2). Recording cannot be
performed.
Connect other power source.
The battery power of the connected HDD will be exhausted
soon.
Change the battery at the earliest opportunity.
The battery of the connected HDD is exhausted. Recording
cannot be performed.
Stop operation to change the battery.
When using Simultaneous Recording in the 2 slots, data is
recorded in only one memory card. To record in the 2 slots
simultaneously, stop recording temporarily and insert
recordable memory cards into both slots.
The battery power of the video light mounted on the Multi
Interface Shoe will soon run out.
Change the battery at the earliest opportunity.
An error was detected with the battery pack.
Replace the battery pack with a normal one.
The remaining power of the backup battery is insufficient.
Replace the battery with a new one.
A partitioned memory card or one that contains recorded clips
exceeding the number permitted with this camcorder is loaded.
This card cannot be used with this camcorder. Remove it and
load a compatible card.
An error occurred with the memory card. The card requires
restoration.
Remove the card, load it again, and restore it.
Record Only Media(A)2)
Flashing
Video Light Battery Near Intermittent
End
Flashing
Battery Error
Please Change Battery
Backup Battery End
Please Change
Unknown Media(A)2)
Please Change
Media Error
Media(A)2) Needs to be
Restored
Media Error
Cannot Record to
Media(A)2)
Media Error
Cannot Use Media(A)2)
Will Switch Slots Soon
Appendices
No Clip
Cannot Use Media(A)2)
Unsupported File System
In This File system
Cannot Use Media(A)2)
Same File Already Exists
Change Media(A)2)
Video Format Mismatch
158
Error/Warning Indications
Recording cannot be done, as the memory card is defective.
As playback may be possible, it is recommended to replace it
with another card after copying the clips, as required.
Neither recording nor playback can be done, as the memory
card is defective.
It cannot be operated with this camcorder. Replace it with
another card.
This is an advanced notice that the camcorder will switch from
the current memory card to the other memory card for
continuous recording.
There are no clips in the memory card.
Check the selected card.
A card of a different file system or an unformatted card was
inserted. It cannot be used with this camcorder.
Replace it with another card or format it with this camcorder.
A memory card incompatible with this file system is inserted.
Replace the card from the respective slot, format it with the
camcorder, or change the “F.Sys.” setting.
A clip with the same name exists in the memory card to which
you want to copy.
Replace the card from the respective slot with a different card.
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be
recorded, as the “Format” setting is different from the signal
format of the external input signal.
Change “Format” in “System” of the OTHERS menu to match
it to that of the external signal.
Warning indication
on LCD/EVF
Copy Protected Input
Cannot Record
Media Error
Playback Halted
Media(A)2) Error
Media Reached
Rewriting Limit
Change Media (A)2)
Reached Clip Number
Limit
Copy Completed to xx/xx
Not Enough Capacity
Copy Completed to xx/xx
Reached Duplication
Limit
Copy Completed to xx/xx
Cannot Record to SD
Card
NG: Media Write
Protected
Cannot Record to SD
Card
Reached Clip Number
Limit
Cannot Record to SD
Card
NG: Preparing
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
The external signal input via the i.LINK connection cannot be
recorded, as the stream is copy-protected.
Check the input signal.
An error occurred in reading data from the memory card, and
playback cannot be continued.
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card after
copying the clips, as required.
Recording cannot be done, as an error occurred with the
memory card.
If this frequently occurs, change the memory card.
The memory card comes to the end of its service life. Make a
backup copy and replace the card with another one as soon as
possible. Recording/playback may not be performed properly
if you continue to use the card.
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the memory
card.
The maximum number of clips for 1 memory card is reached,
so copying cannot continue. (xx/xx indicates the completed
copy operations.)
Replace the card.
There is not enough capacity for copying. (xx/xx indicates the
completed copy operations.)
Replace the card.
There are already 10 or more clips with the same name as the
clip that you want to copy, so copying cannot continue. (xx/xx
indicates the completed copy operations.)
Replace the card.
There is no memory card inserted in the slot.
Insert a card.
The memory card is write-protected.
Remove the card from the slot and remove the writeprotection.
A memory card that cannot be used with the camcorder is
inserted.
Replace the card in the respective slot.
Copying of a general file failed.
Retry copying.
A memory card with an different file system is inserted.
Replace the card, format it with the camcorder, or change the
“F.Sys.” setting.
The SD card is write-protected.
Remove the card from the slot and remove the writeprotection.
Appendices
Copy Error!
(CANCEL:Abort)
No Media!
Copy Error!
(CANCEL:Abort)
Media Write Protected
Copy Error!
(CANCEL:Abort)
Cannot Use Media(A)2)
Copy General Files
NG: Cannot Copy
Unsupported File System
Buzzer
The maximum number of clips for 1 SD card is reached, so
copying cannot continue.
Replace the card.
The proxy recording function is being prepared. Wait a while.
Error/Warning Indications
159
Warning indication
on LCD/EVF
Buzzer
Power supply to MI Shoe
disabled
Cannot Record to SD
Card
Unsupported Device
Cannot Start Streaming
Invalid Dest. Address
Invalid Number
1) B for a HDD connected to slot B
2) (B) for the card in slot B
Appendices
160
Error/Warning Indications
Tally
lamps
Cause and measures
If you mount an accessory that requires power supply on the
Multi Interface Shoe while “NW&Proxy/USB” is set to
“Network&Proxy,” no power is supplied.
When streaming is started, proxy recording to “SD Card” is
not available.
To start proxy recording, stop streaming.
An unsupported device is attached to the external device
connector. Turn the power off to change the device.
The input address in [Dest.Address] of the streaming settings
may not be correct. Input the correct user address.
A port number that cannot be used in [Dest.Port] of the
streaming settings may be input. Input the correct port number.
http://www.mpegla.com
Licenses
Bitmap Fonts
MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio
License
This product uses RICOH Bitmap Fonts
produced and sold by Ricoh Company, Ltd.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR
THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
USE OF A CONSUMER TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD ( “AVC VIDEO”)
AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS
ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN
A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO
PROVIDE AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.
SEE <HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM>
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
MPEG-2 Video Patent Portfolio
License
This EULA is a legal agreement between you and
Sony Corporation (“SONY”). This EULA
governs your rights and obligations regarding the
software of SONY and/or its third party licensors
(including SONY’s affiliates) and their respective
affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS”) contained in the camcorder,
together with any updates/upgrades provided by
SONY, any printed, on-line or other electronic
documentation for such software, and any data
files created by operation of such software
(collectively, the “SOFTWARE”).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in
the SOFTWARE having a separate end user
license agreement (including, but not limited to,
GNU General Public license and Lesser/Library
General Public License) shall be covered by such
applicable separate end user license agreement in
lieu of the terms of this EULA to the extent
required by such separate end user license
agreement (“EXCLUDED SOFTWARE”).
Appendices
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER THAN
CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN ANY
MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR ENCODING
VIDEO INFORMATION FOR PACKAGED
MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED
WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250
STEELE STREET, SUITE 300, DENVER,
COLORADO 80206.
“PACKAGED MEDIA” means any storage
media storing MPEG-2 video information such as
DVD movie which are sold/distributed to general
consumers. Disc replicators or sellers of the
PACKAGED MEDIA need to obtain licenses for
their own business from MPEG LA. Please
contact MPEG LA for any further information.
MPEG LA. L.L.C., 250 STEELE STREET,
SUITE 300, DENVER, COLORADO 80206
IMPORTANT:
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE
CONTAINED IN THE CAMCORDER,
PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY
USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ARE
ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF
YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS
EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE THE
SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The
SOFTWARE is protected by copyright and other
intellectual property laws and international
treaties.
COPYRIGHT
All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE
(including, but not limited to, any images,
Licenses
161
photographs, animation, video, audio, music, text
and “applets” incorporated into the SOFTWARE)
is owned by SONY or one or more of the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS.
GRANT OF LICENSE
SONY grants you a limited license to use the
SOFTWARE solely in connection with the
camcorder and only for your individual use.
SONY and the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS
expressly reserve all rights, title and interest
(including, but not limited to, all intellectual
property rights) in and to the SOFTWARE that
this EULA does not specifically grant to you.
Appendices
REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute,
attempt to derive source code, modify, reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble any of the
SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in part, or
create any derivative works from or of the
SOFTWARE unless such derivative works are
intentionally facilitated by the SOFTWARE. You
may not modify or tamper with any digital rights
management functionality of the SOFTWARE.
You may not bypass, modify, defeat or
circumvent any of the functions or protections of
the SOFTWARE or any mechanisms operatively
linked to the SOFTWARE. You may not separate
any individual component of the SOFTWARE
for use on more than one camcorder unless
expressly authorized to do so by SONY. You may
not remove, alter, cover or deface any trademarks
or notices on the SOFTWARE. You may not
share, distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign,
transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. The software,
network services or other products other than
SOFTWARE upon which the SOFTWARE’S
performance depends might be interrupted or
discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers
(software suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY).
SONY and such suppliers do not warrant that the
SOFTWARE, network services, contents or other
products will continue to be available, or will
operate without interruption or modification.
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE
COMPONENTS
Notwithstanding the foregoing limited license
grant, you acknowledge that the SOFTWARE
may include EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. Certain
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE may be covered by
open source software licenses (“Open Source
Components”), which means any software
162
Licenses
licenses approved as open source licenses by the
Open Source Initiative or any substantially
similar licenses, including but not limited to any
license that, as a condition of distribution of the
software licensed under such license, requires
that the distributor make the software available in
source code format. If and to the extent disclosure
is required, please visit www.sony.com/linux or
other SONY-designated web site for a list of
applicable OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS
included in the SOFTWARE from time to time,
and the applicable terms and conditions
governing its use. Such terms and conditions may
be changed by the applicable third party at any
time without liability to you. To the extent
required by the licenses covering EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE, the terms of such licenses will
apply in lieu of the terms of this EULA. To the
extent the terms of the licenses applicable to
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE prohibit any of the
restrictions in this EULA with respect to such
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, such restrictions will
not apply to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. To
the extent the terms of the licenses applicable to
Open Source Components require SONY to make
an offer to provide source code in connection with
the SOFTWARE, such offer is hereby made.
USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED
MATERIALS
The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used
by you to view, store, process and/or use content
created by you and/or third parties. Such content
may be protected by copyright, other intellectual
property laws, and/or agreements. You agree to
use the SOFTWARE only in compliance with all
such laws and agreements that apply to such
content. You acknowledge and agree that SONY
may take appropriate measures to protect the
copyright of content stored, processed or used by
the SOFTWARE. Such measures include, but are
not limited to, counting the frequency of your
backup and restoration through certain
SOFTWARE features, refusal to accept your
request to enable restoration of data, and
termination of this EULA in the event of your
illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE.
CONTENT SERVICE
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE
SOFTWARE MAY BE DESIGNED TO BE
USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE
THROUGH ONE OR MORE CONTENT
SERVICES (“CONTENT SERVICE”). USE OF
THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS
SUBJECT TO THE TERMS OF SERVICE OF
THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU
DECLINE TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS,
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that
certain content and services available through the
SOFTWARE may be provided by third parties
over which SONY has no control. USE OF THE
CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN
INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT
SERVICE MAY BE DISCONTINUED AT ANY
TIME.
INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY
SERVICES
You acknowledge and agree that access to certain
SOFTWARE features may require an Internet
connection for which you are solely responsible.
Further, you are solely responsible for payment of
any third party fees associated with your Internet
connection, including but not limited to Internet
service provider or airtime charges. Operation of
the SOFTWARE may be limited or restricted
depending on the capabilities, bandwidth or
technical limitations of your Internet connection
and service. The provision, quality and security of
such Internet connectivity are the sole
responsibility of the third party providing such
service.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not
designed, manufactured or intended for use or
resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous
environments requiring fail-safe performance,
such as in the operation of nuclear facilities,
aircraft navigation or communication systems, air
traffic control, direct life support machines, or
weapons systems, in which the failure of the
SOFTWARE could lead to death, personal injury,
or severe physical or environmental damage
(“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). SONY, each of
the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS, and each of
their respective affiliates specifically disclaim
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
You acknowledge and agree that use of the
SOFTWARE is at your sole risk and that you are
responsible for use of the SOFTWARE. The
SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS,” without
warranty, duty or condition of any kind.
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY
and each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS
shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”)
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY DOES NOT
WARRANT OR MAKE ANY CONDITIONS
OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT THE
FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL BE
UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF
ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY
DEFECTS WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT
THE SOFTWARE WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY
OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR
DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE,
NETWORK SERVICES (INCLUDING THE
INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER THAN
THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE
SOFTWARE’S PERFORMANCE DEPENDS
WILL CONTINUE TO BE AVAILABLE,
UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND
(E) REGARDING THE USE OR THE
RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE
IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS,
ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR
OTHERWISE.
Appendices
EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS
You agree to comply with all applicable export
and re-export restrictions and regulations of the
area or country in which you reside, and not to
transfer, or authorize the transfer, of the
SOFTWARE to a prohibited country or otherwise
in violation of any such restrictions or
regulations.
any express or implied warranty, duty or
condition of fitness for HIGH RISK
ACTIVITIES.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR
ADVICE GIVEN BY SONY OR AN
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR
CONDITION OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE
THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD
THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU
Licenses
163
ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, SO THESE EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Appendices
164
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY
and each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS
shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”)
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL
THEORY RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF
DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE
OR ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN
TIME AND USER’S TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF
THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY
CASE, EACH AND ALL OF THEIR
AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY
PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY
PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION
OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
CONSENT TO USE OF NON-PERSONAL
INFORMATION, LOCATION DATA, DATA
SECURITY
You acknowledge and agree that SONY and its
affiliates, partners and agents may read, collect,
transfer, process and store certain information
collected from the SOFTWARE, including but
not limited to information about (i) the
SOFTWARE and (ii) the software applications,
contents and peripheral devices that interact with
your camcorder and the SOFTWARE
(“Information”). Information includes, but is not
limited to: (1) unique identifiers relating to your
camcorder and its components; (2) performance
of the camcorder, the SOFTWARE and their
Licenses
components; (3) configurations of your
camcorder, the SOFTWARE and the software
applications, contents and peripheral devices that
interact with the camcorder and the
SOFTWARE; (4) use and frequency of use of the
functions of (x) the SOFTWARE, and (y) the
software applications, contents and peripheral
devices that interact with the SOFTWARE; and
(5) location data, as indicated below. SONY and
its affiliates, partners and agents may use and
disclose Information subject to applicable laws in
order to improve its products and services or to
provide products or services to you. Such uses
include, but are not limited to: (a) administering
the functionalities of the SOFTWARE; (b) to
improve, service, update or upgrade the
SOFTWARE; (c) improving, developing and
enhancing the current and future products and
services of SONY and other parties; (d) to
provide you with information about the products
and services offered by SONY and other parties;
(e) complying with applicable laws or
regulations; and (f) to the extent offered,
providing you with location-based services of
SONY and other parties, as indicated below. In
addition, SONY retains the right to use
Information to protect itself and third parties from
illegal, criminal or harmful conduct.
Certain services available through the
SOFTWARE may rely upon location
information, including, but not limited to, the
geographic location of the camcorder. You
acknowledge that for the purpose of providing
such services, SONY, the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS or their partners may collect,
archive, process and use such location data, and
that such services are governed by the privacy
policies of SONY or such third party. By using
any such services, you agree that you have
reviewed the privacy policies applicable to such
services and consent to such activities.
SONY, its affiliates, partners and agents will not
intentionally use Information to personally
identify the owner or user of the SOFTWARE
without your knowledge or consent. Any use of
Information will be in accordance with the
privacy policies of SONY or such third party.
Please contact applicable contact address of each
area or country for SONY’s current privacy
policy.
Please contact applicable third parties for privacy
policies relating to personally identifiable and
other information you provide when you use or
access third party software or services.
Information may be processed, stored or
transferred to SONY, its affiliates or agents which
are located in countries outside of your country of
residence. Data protection and information
privacy laws in certain countries may not offer the
same level of protection as your country of
residence and you may have fewer legal rights in
relation to Information processed and stored in, or
transferred to, such countries. SONY will use
reasonable efforts to take appropriate technical
and organizational steps to prevent unauthorized
access to or disclosure of Information, but does
not warrant it will eliminate all risk of misuse of
such Information.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY
This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each as
amended and modified from time to time,
together constitute the entire agreement between
you and SONY with respect to the SOFTWARE.
The failure of SONY to exercise or enforce any
right or provision of this EULA shall not
constitute a waiver of such right or provision. If
any part of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or
unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to
the maximum extent permissible so as to maintain
GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION
The United Nations Convention on Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to
this EULA. This EULA shall be governed by the
laws of Japan, without regards to conflict of laws
provisions. Any dispute arising out of this EULA
shall be subject to the exclusive venue of the
Tokyo District Court in Japan, and the parties
hereby consent to the venue and jurisdiction of
such courts.
EQUITABLE REMEDIES
Notwithstanding anything contained in this
EULA to the contrary, you acknowledge and
agree that any violation of or non-compliance
with this EULA by you will cause irreparable
harm to SONY, for which monetary damages
would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY
obtaining any injunctive or equitable relief that
SONY deems necessary or appropriate in such
circumstances. SONY may also take any legal
and technical remedies to prevent violation of
and/or to enforce this EULA, including, but not
limited to, immediate termination of your use of
the SOFTWARE, if SONY believes in its sole
discretion that you are violating or intend to
violate this EULA. These remedies are in addition
to any other remedies SONY may have at law, in
equity or under contract.
TERMINATION
Without prejudice to any of its other rights,
SONY may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with any of its terms. In case of such
termination, you must: (i) cease all use, and
destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE; (ii)
comply with the requirements in the section
below entitled “Your Account Responsibilities”.
AMENDMENT
SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND
ANY OF THE TERMS OF THIS EULA AT ITS
SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE
ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY
EMAIL NOTIFICATION TO AN EMAIL
ADDRESS PROVIDED BY YOU, BY
PROVIDING NOTICE AS PART OF THE
PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN
UPGRADES/UPDATES OR BY ANY OTHER
LEGALLY RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF
NOTICE. If you do not agree to the amendment,
you should promptly contact SONY for
Licenses
Appendices
AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE
From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS may automatically update or
otherwise modify the SOFTWARE, including,
but not limited to, for purposes of enhancement of
security functions, error correction and
improvement of functions, at such time as you
interact with SONY’s or third parties’ servers, or
otherwise. Such updates or modifications may
delete or change the nature of features or other
aspects of the SOFTWARE, including, but not
limited to, functions you may rely upon. You
acknowledge and agree that such activities may
occur at SONY’s sole discretion and that SONY
may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE
upon your complete installation or acceptance of
such update or modifications. Any updates/
modifications shall be deemed to be, and shall
constitute part of, the SOFTWARE for purposes
of this EULA. By acceptance of this EULA, you
consent to such update/modification.
the intent of this EULA, and the other parts will
remain in full force and effect.
165
instructions. Your continued use of the
SOFTWARE after the effective date of any such
notice shall be deemed your agreement to be
bound by such amendment.
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express
intended third-party beneficiary of, and shall have
the right to enforce, each provision of this EULA
with respect to the SOFTWARE of such party.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Should you have any questions concerning this
EULA, you may contact SONY by writing to
SONY at applicable contact address of each area
or country.
Copyright © 2012 Sony Corporation.
About JQuery, Sizzle.js and
Jansson
This product uses the following software,
released under MIT License.
jQuery JavaScript Library v1.7.2
http://jquery.com/
Copyright 2011, John Resig
Sizzle.js
http://sizzlejs.com/
Copyright 2011, The Dojo Foundation
Date: Wed Mar 21 12:46:34 2012 -0700
Appendices
166
Jansson 2.6
http://www.digip.org/jansson/
Copyright 2009-2013, Petri Lehtinen
MIT License
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and
to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
Licenses
About OpenSSL
Because it uses the OpenSSL Toolkit, this
product uses software developed by the OpenSSL
Project (http://www.openssl.org/).
OpenSSL License
--------------/*
============================
=======
* Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL
* Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and
* binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided
* that the following conditions are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must
*
retain the above copyright notice,
*
this list of conditions and the
*
following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must
*
reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the
*
following disclaimer in the
*
documentation and/or other
*
materials provided with the
*
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and
"OpenSSL Project" must not be used
to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without
prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact opensslcore@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software
may not be called "OpenSSL" nor
may "OpenSSL" appear in their
names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form
whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL
PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
============================
=======
*
* This product includes cryptographic
* software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product
* includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* /
Original SSLeay License
----------------------*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL
implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as
to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and
non-commercial use as long as the
following conditions are aheared to.
The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the
RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not
just the SSL code. The SSL
documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same
copyright terms except that the holder
is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Appendices
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and
as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product,
Eric Young should be given attribution
as the author of the parts of the library
used.
Licenses
167
Appendices
168
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
This can be in the form of a textual
message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual)
provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must
retain the copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other
materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning
features or use of this software must
display the following
acknowledgement:
"This product includes
cryptographic software written by
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left
out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific
code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application
code) you must include an
acknowledgement:
"This product includes software
written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY
ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
Licenses
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for
any publically available version or
derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another
distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]
/
Specifications
General
Mass
Approx. 2.4 kg (5 lb 4.7 oz) (Camcorder
only)
Approx. 2.8 kg (6 lb 2.8 oz) (With lens
hood (1), eyecup (1), battery pack BPU30 (1), SxS memory card (1))
Dimensions (W × H × D)
168 mm × 161 mm × 331 mm
(6 5/8 × 6 3/8 × 13 1/8 inches)
(Not including extruding parts.)
The values for dimensions are
approximate.
Power Requirements
DC 12 V (11 V to 17 V)
Power Consumption
Approx. 18 W
(while recording with LCD Off, EVF
On, I/O Select Off, and Network
function Off)
Approx. 23 W
(while recording with LCD On, EVF
On, I/O Select HD-SDI, and Network
function On)
Operating Temperature
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Storage Temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Recording Format (Video)
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I mode: CBG, 112 Mbps max,
MPEG-4 H.264/AVC
XAVC Long
XAVC-L 50 mode: VBR, 50 Mbps max,
MPEG-4 H.264/AVC
XAVC-L 35 mode: VBR, 35 Mbps max,
MPEG-4 H.264/AVC
XAVC-L 25 mode: VBR, 25 Mbps max,
MPEG-4 H.264/AVC
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422 mode: CBR, 50 Mbps
max, MPEG-2 422P@HL
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: VBR, 35
Mbps max, MPEG-2 MP@HL
MPEG HD420 SP mode: CBR, 25 Mbps
max, MPEG-2 MP@H-14
MPEG IMX
IMX50 mode: CBR, 50 Mbps, MPEG-2
422P@ML Intra
DVCAM
DVCAM mode: CBR, 25 Mbps,
DVCAM
Appendices
Inrush current
(1) Maximum possible inrush current at
initial switch-on (Voltage changes
caused by manual switching): 50 A
peak, 9.5 A r.m.s. (240V AC)
(2) Inrush current after a mains
interruption of five seconds (Voltage
changes caused at zero-crossing): 3 A
peak, 0.7 A r.m.s. (240V AC)
Battery Operation Time
(While recording with LCD Off, EVF
On, I/O Select Off, and Network
function Off)
With battery pack BP-U90: approx. 4.5
hours
With battery pack BP-U60/BP-U60T:
approx. 3 hours
With battery pack BP-U30: approx. 1.5
hours
Recording Format (Audio)
exFAT
XAVC-I mode: LPCM 24-bit, 48-kHz,
4 channels
XAVC-L mode: LPCM 24-bit, 48-kHz,
4 channels
MPEG HD422 mode: LPCM 24-bit,
48-kHz, 4 channels
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: LPCM 16-bit,
48-kHz, 4 channels
Specifications
169
DVCAM mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48-kHz,
4 channels
UDF
MPEG HD422 mode: LPCM 24-bit,
48-kHz, 4 channels
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: LPCM 16-bit,
48-kHz, 4 channels
IMX50 mode: LPCM 24/16-bit,
48-kHz, 4 channels
DVCAM mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48-kHz,
4 channels
FAT
MPEG HD420 HQ mode: LPCM 16-bit,
48-kHz, 4 channels
MPEG HD420 SP mode: LPCM 16-bit,
48-kHz, 4 channels
DVCAM mode: LPCM 16-bit, 48-kHz,
2 channels
Recording Frame Rate
Appendices
170
exFAT
XAVC-I mode:
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L50 mode:
1920 × 1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L35 mode:
1920 × 1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 23.98P, 25P
XAVC-L25 mode:
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i
MPEG HD422 mode:
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
MPEG HD420 HQ mode:
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 23.98P (2-3
Pull Down)
Specifications
DVCAM mode:
720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97PsF
720 × 576/50i, 25PsF
UDF
MPEG HD422 mode:
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
MPEG HD420 HQ mode:
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 23.98P (2-3
Pull Down)
MPEG IMX50 mode:
720 × 486/59.94i, 29.97PsF
720 × 576/50i, 25PsF
DVCAM mode:
720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97PsF
720 × 576/50i, 25PsF
FAT
MPEG HD420 HQ mode:
1920 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
1280 × 720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P,
23.98P, 25P
MPEG HD420 SP mode:
1440 × 1080/59.94i, 50i, 23.98P (2-3
Pull Down)
DVCAM mode:
720 × 480/59.94i, 29.97PsF
720 × 576/50i, 25PsF
Recording/Playback Time
exFAT
XAVC-I mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 120 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 60 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 30 minutes
UDF
MPEG HD422 mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 240 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 120 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 60 minutes
MPEG HD420 HQ mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 360 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 180 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 90 minutes
MPEG IMX50 mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 240 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 120 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 60 minutes
DVCAM mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 440 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 220 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 110 minutes
FAT
MPEG HD420 HQ mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 400 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64GB): Approx. 200 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32GB):
Approx. 100 minutes
MPEG HD420 SP mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 560 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64GB): Approx. 280 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32GB):
Approx. 140 minutes
DVCAM mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 520 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64GB): Approx. 260 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32GB):
Approx. 130 minutes
Specifications
Appendices
XAVC-L50 mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 240 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 120 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 60 minutes
XAVC-L35 mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 340 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 170 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 85 minutes
XAVC-L25 mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 440 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 220 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 110 minutes
MPEG HD422 mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 240 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 120 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 60 minutes
MPEG HD420 HQ mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 360 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 180 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 90 minutes
DVCAM mode
When using SBP-128B (128 GB):
Approx. 440 minutes
When using SBP-64B / SBS-64G1A
(64 GB): Approx. 220 minutes
When using SBS-32G1A (32 GB):
Approx. 110 minutes
171
Note
These approximate playback times depend on operating
conditions, available memory, etc.
Camera Section
Image Device (Type)
1/2-inch triple chip “Exmor” Full HD
CMOS image sensor
Lens
Lens Mount
Fixed type
Zoom Ratio
17× (optical), power/manual switchable
Focal Length
f = 5.6 mm to 95.2 mm
(equivalent to 29.3 mm to 499 mm on a
35 mm lens)
Iris
Auto/manual switchable
F1.9 to F16 and C (close)
Focus
AF/MF/Full MF switchable
800 mm to ∞ (macro OFF)
50 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide end)
800 mm to ∞ (macro ON, tele end)
Image Stabilizer
ON/OFF possible, shift-lens system
Filter Diameter
M 77 mm, pitch 0.75 mm
Effective Picture Elements
1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
Optical System
F1.6 prism system
Built-in Optical Filters
CLEAR: Clear
1: 1/8ND
2: 1/64ND
Sensitivity (2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance)
F12 (typical, 1920 × 1080/59.94i mode)
F13 (typical, 1920 × 1080/50i mode)
Minimum Illumination
0.09 lx (typical, 1920 × 1080/59.94i)
0.07 lx (typical, 1920 × 1080/50i)
(F1.9, +18 dB gain, with 64-frame
accumulation, Gamma off, 100%
video level)
0.02 lx (typical, 1920 × 1080/59.94i)
0.02 lx (typical, 1920 × 1080/50i)
(F1.9, +18 dB gain, with 64-frame
accumulation, Gamma on, 50% video
level)
Appendices
S/N Ratio
58 dB (Y) (typical)
Horizontal Resolution
1,000 TV lines or more (1920 × 1080i
mode)
Shutter Speed
1/32 sec. to 1/2,000 sec.
Slow Shutter (SLS)
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 32, and 64-frame
accumulation
172
Specifications
-10 dBu (Reference level), 47 kΩ
(common with Composite Output)
Slow & Quick Motion Function
XAVC Intra, XAVC Long
1080P: 1 to 30 and 60 fps in NTSC
setting, 1 to 25 and 50 fps in PAL
setting
720P: 1 to 60 fps in NTSC setting, 1 to
50 fps in PAL setting
MPEG HD422
1080P: 1 to 30 fps in NTSC setting, 1 to
25 fps in PAL setting
720P: 1 to 60 fps in NTSC setting, 1 to
50 fps in PAL setting
MPEG HD420 HQ
1080P: 1 to 30 fps
720P: 1 to 60 fps
White Balance
Preset mode (3200K), Memory A mode,
Memory B mode/ATW mode
Gain
–3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18 dB, AGC
Gamma Curve
Selectable
SDI Output
BNC type (1), switchable with 3G/HD/
SD
SMPTE 292M/259M/424M/425M
standards
i.LINK
IEEE 1394, 4-pin connector (1), HDV
(HDV 1080i) / DV input/output, S400
Timecode Input
BNC type (1), switchable with TC OUT
connector
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ
Timecode Output
BNC type (1), switchable with TC IN
connector
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Genlock Input
BNC type (1), switchable with VIDEO
OUT connector
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
USB
USB device, mini-B (1)
Inputs/Outputs
Composite Output
AV multi-connector (1), NTSC or PAL
(common with Audio Output)
Video Output
BNC type (1), HD-Y/composite signal,
switchable with GENLOCK IN
connector
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω
Appendices
Audio Input
XLR type 3-pin (2), female, LINE/MIC/
MIC+48V switchable
LINE: +4 dBu
MIC: –70 dBu to –30 dBu
(Reference level 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
Headphone Output
Stereo minijack (1)
–18 dBu (Reference level output under
16 Ω load)
Speaker Output
Monaural, 250 mW
DC input
DC jack (1)
Lens Remote
8-pin round (1)
HDMI Output
Type A (1)
Option
4-pin (Type A) (1)
Audio Output
AV multi-connector (1),
Specifications
173
Monitoring
Software Downloads
Viewfinder
0.45-inch color LCD: 852 (H) × 480 (V),
16:9
When the unit is used with a PC connection,
download any device drivers, plug-ins, and
application software you require from the
following websites.
Built-in LCD Monitor
3.5-inch color LCD monitor: 960 (H) ×
3 (RGB) × 540 (V), 16:9
Built-in Microphone
Built-in Microphone
Omnidirectional stereo electret
condenser microphone
Media
Type
ExpressCard/34 slot (2)
Sony Professional products website:
U.S.A.
http://pro.sony.com
Canada
http://www.sonybiz.ca
Latin America http://sonypro-latin.com
Europe
http://www.pro.sony.eu/pro
Middle East, Africa
http://sony-psmea.com
Russia
http://sony.ru/pro/
Brazil
http://sonypro.com.br
Australia
http://pro.sony.com.au
New Zealand
http://pro.sony.co.nz
Japan
http://www.sonybsc.com
Asia Pacific
http://pro.sony-asia.com
Korea
http://bp.sony.co.kr
China
http://pro.sony.com.cn
India
http://pro.sony.co.in
Sony Creative Software, software download
page:
http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/
download/software_for_sony_equipment
Supplied Accessories
Appendices
174
Lens hood (1)
This is pre-installed to the camcorder.
EVF eyecup (1)
This is pre-installed to the camcorder.
Infrared Remote Commander (1)
USB wireless LAN module IFU-WLM3 (1)
Accessory shoe kit (1)
BP-U30 battery pack (1)
Battery Charger/AC Adaptor: BC-U1 (1)
Power cord (1)
USB cable (1)
AV connecting cable (1)
Shoulder strap (1)
Lithium battery (CR2032 for backup) (1)
This is pre-installed to the camcorder.
Lithium battery (CR2025 for the IR Remote
Commander) (1)
This is pre-installed to the IR Remote
Commander.
Warranty Booklet (1)
“Before Using this Unit” (1)
CD-ROM “Operating instructions” (1)
Specifications
Optional Accessories
Battery pack
BP-U30, BP-U60, BP-U60T, BP-U90
Battery charger/AC adaptor
BC-U1, BC-U2
SxS memory card
SxS PRO Series
SxS-1 Series
SxS memory card USB reader/writer
SBAC-US20
Media Adaptor
QDA-EX1 (for XQD memory cards)
MEAD-SD02 (for SDHC cards)
Electret condenser microphone
ECM-VG1, ECM-673, ECM-674,
ECM-678, ECM-MS2, ECM-680S
Battery video light compatible with the Multi
Interface Shoe
HVL-LBPC
Wireless microphone compatible with the Multi
Interface Shoe
UWP-D11/D12
Multi Interface Shoe mount adaptor
SMAD-P3
Network adaptor kit
CBK-NA1
* To attach accessories to the rear accessory shoe,
use the cold shoe kit.
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Notes
Appendices
• Always make a test recording, and verify that
it was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS
UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA,
EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR
ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE
SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF
ANY TYPE.
• Always verify that the unit is operating
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF
PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS
DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT,
EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY
PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF
THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER
REASON WHATSOEVER.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
CLAIMS OF ANY KIND MADE BY
USERS OF THIS UNIT OR MADE BY
THIRD PARTIES.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
LOSS, REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF
ANY DATA RECORDED ON THE
INTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEM,
RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS.
• SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION
OF ANY SERVICES RELATED TO THIS
UNIT THAT MAY RESULT DUE TO
CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY KIND.
Specifications
175
Numerics
Black 52
Black Gamma 52
built-in speaker 82
built-in stereo microphones 36
Button/Remote Status Screen 90
23.98P Output 107
3G SDI OUT Level A/B 107
C
Index
A
Appendices
176
A/V OUT connector 127
AC Adaptor 18
AC Power 19
Accessory shoe 10
Accessory shoe plate 10
AGC mode 32
All Reset 118
All-Clip thumbnail screen 80
Aperture 51
Area Detection 52
Assign Button 119
Assignable Buttons 40
ATW 31
ATW Mode 103
ATW Speed 102
Audio Input 104
AUDIO LEVEL knobs 37
audio monitoring 38
Audio Output 105
audio recording levels 37
AUDIO SELECT switches 37
AUDIO SET Menu 104
AUDIO Status 89
Auto Black Bal 103
Auto FB Adjust 45, 103
Auto Naming 29
Auto Shutter 33
Auto White Balance 32
Auto-Tracing White balance 31
B
backlight 20
backup battery 154
Battery Alarm 120
Battery Charger 18
Battery INFO 120
Battery Pack 18
Battery/Media Status Screen 90
Index
Camera Data 118
CAMERA SET Menu 96
CAMERA Status Screen 89
Channel 116
Charge Count 90
Clip 29, 81, 122, 127
Clip Cont. Rec 41, 99
Clip Name Disp 124
Clip name 29
Clip Operation menu 82
Clock 20
Clock Set 118
CMOS Image Sensors 135
Color Bars 97
Color Correction 48
Color Detection 52
Copy 52
Copy All 123
Country 121
Cueing up 82
D
DC IN connector 19
DC IN Power 19
delete shot marks 88
Deleting Clips 53
Depth-of-Field bar indication 15
Detail 49
Direct Menu 16, 120
DISP CLIP INFO 84
Display On/Off 110
Down Converter 107
DURATION/TC/U-BIT button 36
E
Electronic Shutter 33
Electronic Viewfinder 20
Entering a character string 95
Error Indications 157
EVF 20, 109
EX SLS 33
EXPAND (COARSE) 87
EXPAND (FINE) 87
EXPAND CLIP Screen 83, 86
Exposure 33
ExpressCard slot 127
External Input Signals 130
External Monitors 126
External Synchronization 131
Eyepiece focusing knob 9
F
F.Sys. 121
Fan Control 125
Flange focal length 45
Flicker Reduce 35, 97
Flickers 35
Focus 34
FOCUS MAG button 34
Format 25, 121
Format Media 123
Frame Rec 99
Frame Recording 40, 99
FULL AUTO button 28
Full Auto mode 28
Full MF mode 34
G
Gain 32
Gain Setup 96
Gamma 51
Genlock 120
GENLOCK IN connector 131
GPS
H
Handle Zoom 98
handle ZOOM button 34
HD Detail 49
HD/SD 121
HDMI OUT connector 126
I
i.LINK 129
i.LINK connector 127
Image Alignment 44
Image Inversion 103
Input Source Select 106
Interval Rec 98
Interval Recording 40, 98
IP Address 116
IR Remote 13, 120
J
Jog dial 94
K
Knee 51
KP Flag 39
L
Language 118
LCD 20, 109
LCD/VF SET Menu 109
Lens hood 8
LENS REMOTE connector 34
Limitations of Inputs/Outputs 149
Low Key SAT 52
M
Macro mode 35
Marker 32, 110
Match Clip Name 108
Matrix 47
MEAD-SD02 25, 174
Media Adaptor 25
Media Full 24
Media Near Full 24
Memory A mode 31
Memory B mode 31
MENU button 94
Menu Scroll 125
MF Assist 97
microphone holder 36
Monitoring audio 37
Appendices
GPS 124
GPS module 9
GPS positioning status
indication 91
GPS reception state 57
GPS status indication 15
headphone connector 37
Histogram indication 15
Hours Meter 120
Index
177
Multi Matrix 48
Multi Matrix mode 47
N
Network Mode 114
Network Reset 117
NFC 115
NG Flag 39
Nonlinear Editing 130
NW&Proxy/USB 114
O
OK Flag 39
OK Mark 39
OK-Clip thumbnail screen 80
OTHERS Menu 118
Output Signal 141
P
P.Cache Rec 99
Password 116
PAUSE 87, 88
Peaking 34, 109
Picture Cache Recording 42
Picture Profiles 45
Plan.Metadata 54, 124
Planning metadata 54
PLAY/PAUSE button 81
Power Zoom 34
PP Data 52
Preset mode 31
Preventing switching errors 29
Profile Name 47
Proxy 101
Proxy File 115
Proxy Recording 58
Appendices
178
R
REC HOLD lever 29
Rec Review 39, 102
REC REVIEW button 29
REC START/STOP button 29
Recording audio signals 36
recording start mark 41, 83
Reference Tone 38
Regenerate Key 116
Reset 52
Index
S
S&Q Motion 43, 100
SD Detail 50
SDHC Cards 25
SDI OUT connector 126
SDI Rec Control 107, 126
SDI/HDMI/i.LINK I/O Select 106
SDI/HDMI/Video Out Super 107
SEL/SET buttons 94
SEL/SET dial 94
Setting Data 53
Setup Menus 92, 96
Shockless White 102
SHOT MARK 38, 83
SHOT MARK Screen 83, 87
shot marks 38, 82, 88
Shutter 96
Simul Rec 101
Skin Tone Detail 50
SLOT SELECT button 80
Slow & Quick Motion 43
SLS/EX SLS 97
SSID&Key 115
Status Screens 89
Steady Shot 35
Streaming 114
Streaming Edit 115
SxS Device Driver Software 127
SxS Memory Cards 22
System 121
T
Tally 120
TC Format 113
TC IN connector 132
TC Out 133
TC OUT connector 133
TC/UB SET Menu 112
THUMBNAIL button 80
Thumbnail Screens 79, 82
time and date 20
Time Data 36
Time Zone 20, 118
Timecode 36, 112, 131
TLCS 28, 102
Trigger Mode 120, 129
U
USB cable 127
USB Flash Drives 26
USB wireless LAN module 59
User Name 116
Users Bit 36, 112
UTC 20
V
Version 125
Version Up 125
Video Formats 30
Video Light Set 103
VIDEO OUT connector 126
VIDEO SET Menu 106
Video Status Screen 90
Viewfinder 20
VOLUME buttons 82
W
Warning Indications 157
White 49
WHITE BAL button 32
WHITE BAL switch 31
White Balance 31
White Clip 51
White Switch <B> 102
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Remote 115
Wi-Fi remote commander 71
Wi-Fi Version 117
Wi-Fi Version Up 117
Wired LAN Set 116
WPS 115
X
Appendices
XAVC/MPEG2 121
XQD Memory Cards 25
Z
Zebra 32, 110
zebra pattern 32
Zoom 34, 98
Zoom Speed 34, 98
Zoom Transition 98
Index
179
Download PDF